1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
68 \font_roman "default" "default"
69 \font_sans "default" "default"
70 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
71 \font_math "auto" "auto"
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \font_sf_scale 100 100
77 \font_tt_scale 100 100
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation skip
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes false
145 \output_changes false
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Note Note
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
504 Code box prevent that the term
505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
513 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
514 More about \SpecialChar TeX
515 Code is described in section
520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
522 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
526 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
527 is explained in section
532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
534 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
544 \begin_inset Index idx
547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
548 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
554 See section 5.1 of the
558 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
562 \begin_layout Chapter
563 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
567 \begin_layout Section
568 Basic File Operations
569 \begin_inset Index idx
572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
581 \begin_layout Standard
586 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
587 in addition to some more advanced operations:
590 \begin_layout Itemize
612 \begin_layout Itemize
628 arg "buffer-new-template"
634 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Itemize
714 arg "buffer-write-as"
720 \begin_layout Itemize
734 \begin_layout Itemize
748 \begin_layout Standard
749 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
750 a few minor differences.
753 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
764 command lists the available templates.
765 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
766 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
767 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
775 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
782 \begin_layout Standard
783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
815 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
816 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
817 is just that — a big, blank space.
825 \begin_layout Standard
846 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
851 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
854 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
872 will reload the document from disk.
873 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
874 and want to restore it to the last save.
883 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
884 them as your changes.
887 \begin_layout Section
888 Basic Editing Features
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
901 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
908 \begin_layout Standard
909 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
910 can perform cut and paste operations
911 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
912 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
913 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
914 editing features and how to access
916 We will start with cut and paste.
919 \begin_layout Standard
920 As you might expect, the
924 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
925 various other editing features.
926 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
930 \begin_layout Itemize
936 \begin_inset Index idx
939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
968 \begin_layout Itemize
974 \begin_inset Index idx
977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1006 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset Index idx
1015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1040 \begin_layout Itemize
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1050 \begin_layout Itemize
1054 \begin_inset space ~
1060 \begin_layout Itemize
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1068 \begin_inset space ~
1074 \begin_inset Index idx
1077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1086 \begin_inset Index idx
1089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1104 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1114 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1120 \begin_layout Standard
1121 The first three are self-explanatory.
1122 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1123 and other programs by
1144 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1145 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1150 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1151 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1152 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1153 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1154 into individual cells.
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1164 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1168 \begin_layout Standard
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1177 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1179 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1181 \begin_inset space ~
1188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1194 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1195 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1196 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1202 \begin_inset space \space{}
1205 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1206 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1231 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1232 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1234 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1238 \begin_inset space ~
1243 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1244 start a new paragraph.
1245 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1246 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1251 \begin_inset space ~
1254 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1268 \begin_inset space ~
1271 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1274 paste from the primary selection.
1275 This is normally the currently selected text.
1278 \begin_layout Standard
1281 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1305 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1311 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1314 \begin_inset space ~
1323 \begin_inset space ~
1328 button to skip the current word.
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1337 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1341 \begin_inset space ~
1346 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1348 If the toggle is set, searching for
1349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1360 will not match the word
1361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1375 Match whole words only
1377 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1378 to only find complete words, e.
1379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 offers also an advanced
1411 \begin_inset space ~
1415 \begin_inset space ~
1420 feature that is described in sec.
1421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1427 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1434 \begin_layout Standard
1435 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1436 \begin_inset space \space{}
1440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1448 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1450 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1455 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1462 \begin_layout Standard
1466 arg "inset-select-all"
1469 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1470 When the cursor is inside an inset
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 selects the content of the inset.
1480 arg "inset-select-all"
1483 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1488 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1491 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1495 \begin_layout Section
1497 \begin_inset Index idx
1500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1507 \begin_inset Index idx
1510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1519 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1529 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1535 or the toolbar button
1541 to undo some mistake.
1542 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1547 or the toolbar button
1554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1561 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1565 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1578 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1579 This is a consequence of the 100
1580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1583 step undo limit mentioned above.
1586 \begin_layout Standard
1595 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1597 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1601 \begin_layout Section
1603 \begin_inset Index idx
1606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1615 \begin_layout Standard
1616 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1619 \begin_layout Enumerate
1624 \begin_layout Itemize
1629 once anywhere in the edit window.
1630 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1634 \begin_layout Enumerate
1639 \begin_layout Itemize
1646 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1652 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1653 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1656 \begin_layout Itemize
1657 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1667 \begin_layout Enumerate
1668 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1672 \begin_layout Standard
1673 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1674 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1678 \begin_layout Section
1680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1682 name "sec:Navigating"
1687 \begin_inset Index idx
1690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1699 \begin_layout Standard
1701 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1704 \begin_layout Itemize
1709 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1710 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1713 \begin_layout Itemize
1714 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1716 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1718 \begin_inset space ~
1723 or by the toolbar button
1726 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1732 \begin_layout Itemize
1733 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1735 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1738 and use the same menu to return to them.
1739 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1746 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1751 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1752 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1754 \begin_inset space ~
1759 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1760 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1761 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1762 your last editing position.
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1770 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1774 \begin_layout Subsection
1776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1778 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1785 \begin_layout Standard
1786 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1787 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1788 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1796 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1800 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1807 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1812 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1818 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1819 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1820 dialog and to modify the citation.
1823 \begin_layout Standard
1824 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1826 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1827 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1835 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1838 \begin_layout Standard
1839 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1840 you further to control the display.
1845 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1846 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1852 option keeps it in the current view state.
1853 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1857 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1861 3, the subsections of sections
1862 \begin_inset space ~
1865 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1870 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1871 \begin_inset space ~
1875 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1885 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1888 \begin_layout Standard
1895 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1896 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1910 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1911 So, for example, you can move section
1912 \begin_inset space ~
1916 \begin_inset space ~
1919 2.4 or after section
1920 \begin_inset space ~
1925 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1938 (or the corresponding key bindings
1946 ) you can change the level of sections.
1947 So you can for example make section
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \begin_inset space ~
1956 \begin_inset space ~
1962 \begin_layout Section
1963 Input/Word Completion
1964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1966 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1971 \begin_inset Index idx
1974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1981 \begin_inset Index idx
1984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2015 \begin_layout Standard
2017 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2019 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2020 is used to propose completions.
2023 \begin_layout Standard
2024 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2027 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2032 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2039 \begin_inset space ~
2043 \begin_inset space ~
2048 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2052 \begin_inset space ~
2057 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2058 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2068 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2069 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2070 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2071 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2074 \begin_layout Standard
2076 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2077 completions available.
2082 key to accept a proposed completion.
2083 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2084 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2085 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2092 \begin_layout Standard
2093 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2094 ing options for text.
2095 The special math option
2099 enables characters to be composed.
2100 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2101 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2104 , you can then input the characters
2105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2116 to a formula to get it.
2117 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2118 of the math toolbar.
2119 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2123 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2124 's installation folder.
2125 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2134 \begin_layout Section
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_inset Index idx
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Standard
2213 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2227 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2230 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2234 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2241 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2248 \begin_layout Standard
2252 \begin_inset space ~
2260 \begin_inset space ~
2281 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2285 \begin_layout Labeling
2286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2290 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2291 LatexCommand nomenclature
2293 description "Tabulator key"
2299 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2301 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2308 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2315 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2319 , especially section
2320 \begin_inset space ~
2324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2326 reference "subsec:Lists"
2332 If you are still confused, look in the
2337 \begin_inset Newline newline
2345 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2346 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2350 \begin_layout Labeling
2351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2355 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2356 LatexCommand nomenclature
2358 description "Escape key"
2365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2372 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2373 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2376 \begin_layout Labeling
2377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2383 \begin_inset space ~
2387 \begin_inset space ~
2394 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2395 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2399 \begin_layout Standard
2400 There are three modifier keys:
2403 \begin_layout Labeling
2404 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2422 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2423 LatexCommand nomenclature
2425 description "Control key"
2429 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2430 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2434 \begin_layout Itemize
2443 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2446 \begin_layout Itemize
2455 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2458 \begin_layout Itemize
2467 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2471 \begin_layout Labeling
2472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2491 LatexCommand nomenclature
2493 description "Shift key"
2497 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2498 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2501 \begin_layout Labeling
2502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Alt or Meta key"
2527 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2528 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2529 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2535 \begin_inset Newline newline
2538 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2540 menu accelerator keys
2543 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2544 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2548 \begin_layout Standard
2549 For example, the sequence
2550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2560 \begin_inset space ~
2566 \begin_inset space ~
2574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2593 \begin_inset space ~
2599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2609 \begin_layout Standard
2614 manual lists all other things bound to the
2622 \begin_layout Standard
2623 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2625 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2626 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2627 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2628 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2629 The \SpecialChar LyX
2630 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2631 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2632 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2634 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2650 followed by a capital
2657 \begin_layout Chapter
2660 \begin_inset Index idx
2663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2673 \begin_layout Section
2675 \begin_inset Index idx
2678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2687 \begin_layout Subsection
2691 \begin_layout Standard
2692 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2693 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2694 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2695 numbering schemes, and so on.
2696 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2697 and format the title of your document differently.
2700 \begin_layout Standard
2705 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2706 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2707 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2708 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2709 picks one for you by default.
2710 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2713 \begin_layout Subsection
2715 \begin_inset Index idx
2718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2727 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2734 \begin_layout Standard
2735 You can select a class using the
2737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2738 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2742 \begin_inset Index idx
2745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2752 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2760 \begin_layout Standard
2761 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2766 \begin_layout Description
2767 Article for basic articles
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 Report for basic reports
2774 \begin_layout Description
2775 Book for writing a book
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 Letter for US-style letters
2782 \begin_layout Standard
2783 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2784 only uses if you have installed
2785 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2786 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2787 distributions will include
2789 Here are some of the classes.
2790 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2792 Special Document Classes
2801 \begin_layout Description
2802 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2810 \begin_layout Description
2811 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2817 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2818 There are three article layouts available.
2819 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2820 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2821 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2822 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2827 sequential numbering
2828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2831 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2832 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2833 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2834 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2837 \begin_layout Description
2838 Beamer Layout for presentations
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2843 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2844 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2845 with \SpecialChar LyX
2849 \begin_layout Description
2850 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2853 \begin_layout Description
2855 \begin_inset space ~
2858 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2861 \begin_layout Description
2862 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2865 \begin_layout Description
2866 Foils Used to make transparencies
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2871 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2872 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2873 with \SpecialChar LyX
2877 \begin_layout Description
2878 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2879 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2882 \begin_layout Description
2883 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2890 \begin_layout Description
2891 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2892 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2893 (Is used by this document.)
2896 \begin_layout Description
2897 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2900 \begin_layout Description
2901 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2904 \begin_layout Description
2909 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2910 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2912 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Slides Used to make transparencies
2920 \begin_layout Description
2922 \begin_inset space ~
2925 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2926 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2933 \begin_layout Standard
2934 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2936 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2942 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2943 of the document classes.
2946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2950 \begin_layout Standard
2951 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2956 \begin_inset Index idx
2959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2977 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2979 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2982 \begin_layout Standard
2985 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2990 , are highly specialized.
2992 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2993 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2994 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2995 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2996 by some document class.
2997 There are just too many of them.
2998 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3010 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3011 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3012 document class for a new file.
3014 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3019 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3028 manual for information on how to install them.
3029 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3035 \begin_layout Standard
3036 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3037 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3038 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3039 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3040 class files to be used for dissertation
3041 s submitted to those universities.
3042 The \SpecialChar LyX
3043 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3045 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3049 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3055 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3062 name "subsec:Modules"
3067 \begin_inset Index idx
3070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3079 \begin_layout Standard
3080 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3081 chosen document class.
3082 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3083 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3094 \begin_inset Index idx
3097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3104 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3110 packages or file format converters that are not always
3111 installed by default.
3113 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3114 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3115 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3116 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3118 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3119 file without the missing prerequisites.
3120 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3121 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3132 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3142 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3151 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3163 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3165 will advise you about these things.
3173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3177 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3182 \begin_inset Index idx
3185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3186 Document ! Local Layout
3194 \begin_layout Standard
3195 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3196 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 : They are intended to be used in
3198 a variety of different documents.
3199 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3200 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3201 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3202 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3203 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3205 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3223 manual for information on how to use it.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_layout Standard
3231 Each class has a default set of options.
3232 Here's a quick table describing them:
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3236 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3242 \begin_layout Standard
3244 \begin_inset Tabular
3245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3705 \begin_layout Standard
3706 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3712 \begin_layout Standard
3713 You're probably also wondering what
3714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3718 \begin_inset space ~
3722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3726 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3727 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3732 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3737 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3747 headings, there are also
3755 headings, and so on.
3756 We will describe these headings fully in section
3757 \begin_inset space ~
3761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3763 reference "subsec:Headings"
3770 \begin_layout Subsection
3772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3774 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3779 \begin_inset Index idx
3782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 \begin_inset Index idx
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3801 \begin_layout Standard
3802 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3811 \begin_inset space ~
3819 \begin_inset space ~
3824 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3826 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3827 doesn't support special options you want to
3828 use for your document.
3829 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3830 -class and its options, you have to read
3834 \begin_layout Standard
3838 \begin_inset space ~
3845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3851 \begin_inset space ~
3856 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3857 You can choose between the following five options:
3860 \begin_layout Labeling
3861 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3866 Use default page style of current class.
3869 \begin_layout Labeling
3870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3875 No page numbers or headings.
3878 \begin_layout Labeling
3879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3887 \begin_layout Labeling
3888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3893 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3894 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3895 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3896 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3899 \begin_layout Labeling
3900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3905 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3906 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3912 \begin_inset Index idx
3915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3917 -packages ! fancyhdr
3923 How they are defined is explained in section
3924 \begin_inset space ~
3928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3930 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3939 \begin_inset space ~
3943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3945 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3952 \begin_layout Subsection
3953 Paper Size and Orientation
3954 \begin_inset Index idx
3957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3958 Document ! Paper size
3964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3966 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3973 \begin_layout Standard
3974 You can find the following options in the menu
3977 \begin_inset space ~
3984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3988 \begin_inset Index idx
3991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4000 \begin_layout Labeling
4001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4005 \begin_inset space ~
4010 What size paper to print on.
4015 \begin_layout Itemize
4021 \begin_layout Itemize
4027 \begin_layout Itemize
4033 \begin_layout Itemize
4039 \begin_layout Itemize
4042 US letter, US legal, US executive
4045 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Itemize
4058 \begin_layout Labeling
4059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4064 To choose whether to output as
4075 \begin_layout Labeling
4076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4080 \begin_inset space ~
4085 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4086 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4089 \begin_layout Subsection
4091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4093 name "subsec:Margins"
4098 \begin_inset Index idx
4101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4108 \begin_inset Index idx
4111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 \begin_layout Standard
4121 Paper margins are set in the menu
4123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4127 \begin_inset Index idx
4130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4139 \begin_layout Standard
4140 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4141 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4142 the paper format and the font size into account.
4145 \begin_layout Subsection
4149 \begin_layout Standard
4150 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4156 That includes the paragraph environments.
4157 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4158 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4159 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4161 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4170 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4172 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4173 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4174 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4177 \begin_layout Section
4178 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4179 \begin_inset Index idx
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4183 Paragraph ! Indentation
4191 \begin_layout Subsection
4193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4195 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4202 \begin_layout Standard
4203 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4204 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4207 \begin_layout Standard
4208 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4209 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4210 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4211 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4215 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4221 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4222 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4223 language than English.
4225 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4228 \begin_layout Standard
4229 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4230 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4231 into \SpecialChar LyX
4233 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4236 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4238 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4239 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4240 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4247 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4248 goes to produce a printable file.
4253 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4255 gives you the ability globally to change
4259 these pre-coded spacings.
4260 We will explain more later.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4264 Paragraph Separation
4265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4267 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4272 \begin_inset Index idx
4275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 Paragraph ! Separation
4284 \begin_layout Standard
4292 \begin_inset space ~
4300 \begin_inset space ~
4307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4311 \begin_inset Index idx
4314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4323 \begin_layout Subsection
4327 \begin_layout Standard
4328 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4333 \begin_inset space ~
4338 dialog and toggle the
4341 \begin_inset space ~
4346 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4349 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4353 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4354 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4358 \begin_layout Standard
4359 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4360 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4363 \begin_layout Subsection
4365 \begin_inset Index idx
4368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4369 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4377 \begin_layout Standard
4380 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4384 \begin_inset Index idx
4387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4396 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4400 \begin_inset space ~
4409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4410 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4416 \begin_inset Index idx
4419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4421 -packages ! setspace
4426 installed to use this feature.
4431 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4435 \begin_inset space ~
4440 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4441 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4444 \begin_layout Section
4445 Paragraph Environments
4446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4448 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4453 \begin_inset Index idx
4456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 Paragraph ! Environments
4463 \begin_inset Index idx
4466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4467 Paragraph environments|(
4475 \begin_layout Subsection
4479 \begin_layout Standard
4480 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4483 \begin_layout Standard
4502 \begin_inset Newline newline
4505 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4507 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4508 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4509 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4518 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 A paragraph environment is simply a
4523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4530 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4531 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4532 scheme, labels, and so on.
4533 Additionally, you can
4534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4541 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4542 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4543 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4544 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4546 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4548 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4551 \begin_layout Standard
4552 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4553 \begin_inset Graphics
4554 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4560 at the left end of the toolbar.
4562 will change the environment of the
4566 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4567 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4568 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4572 \begin_layout Standard
4581 create a new paragraph using the
4585 paragraph environment.
4587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4594 because if you are in one of these environments:
4597 \begin_layout Itemize
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 \begin_layout Itemize
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4633 \begin_layout Itemize
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4641 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4645 , rather than resetting it to
4650 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4651 \begin_inset space ~
4655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4657 reference "sec:Nesting"
4664 \begin_layout Subsection
4668 \begin_layout Standard
4669 The default paragraph environment is
4674 It creates a plain paragraph.
4676 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4677 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4678 this manual) are in the
4685 \begin_layout Standard
4686 You can nest a paragraph using the
4690 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4698 \begin_layout Subsection
4700 \begin_inset Index idx
4703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4714 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4723 for thanks or contact information.
4724 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4725 places all of this on a separate page
4726 along with today's date.
4727 For other types of documents, the title
4728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4735 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4739 \begin_layout Standard
4741 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4755 Here's how you use them:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4759 Put the title of your document in the
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 Put the author name in the
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4776 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4782 Note that using this environment is optional.
4783 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4784 will automatically insert today's date.
4785 If you don't want a date, use the option
4787 Suppress default date on front page
4791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4792 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4794 \begin_inset space ~
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4803 You can use footnotes to insert
4804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4811 or contact information.
4814 \begin_layout Subsection
4816 \begin_inset Index idx
4819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4828 name "subsec:Headings"
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4838 takes care of the numbering for you.
4841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4843 \begin_inset Index idx
4846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4847 Section headings ! Numbered
4855 \begin_layout Standard
4856 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4860 \begin_layout Enumerate
4866 \begin_layout Enumerate
4872 \begin_layout Enumerate
4878 \begin_layout Enumerate
4884 \begin_layout Enumerate
4890 \begin_layout Enumerate
4896 \begin_layout Enumerate
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4904 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4905 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4906 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4909 \begin_layout Standard
4910 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4911 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4912 You group the book into chapters.
4914 does a similar grouping:
4917 \begin_layout Itemize
4922 is divided into either
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4945 \begin_layout Itemize
4957 \begin_layout Itemize
4969 \begin_layout Itemize
4981 \begin_layout Itemize
4993 \begin_layout Standard
4994 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5002 Not all document types use the
5006 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5011 is the top-level heading.
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5024 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5025 labels it with its number,
5026 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5028 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5042 \begin_inset Index idx
5045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5046 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5054 \begin_layout Standard
5055 The unnumbered section headings have a
5056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5063 at the end of their name.
5064 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5065 the table of contents, see section
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5080 Changing the Numbering
5081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5083 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5090 \begin_layout Standard
5091 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5092 in the Table of Contents.
5093 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5095 Just as certain classes start with
5109 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5119 This is something you can change.
5122 \begin_layout Standard
5125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5129 \begin_inset Index idx
5132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5141 \begin_inset space ~
5145 \begin_inset space ~
5150 you will see two counters.
5155 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5156 numbers a section heading.
5157 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5162 Short Titles of Headings
5163 \begin_inset Index idx
5166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5167 Section headings ! Short titles
5173 \begin_inset Argument 1
5176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5185 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5193 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5194 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5195 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5196 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5199 \begin_layout Standard
5201 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5202 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5203 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5204 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5209 \begin_inset space ~
5215 This will insert a box labeled
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset space ~
5224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5227 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5228 This also works for captions inside floats.
5229 There can only be one short title per title.
5232 \begin_layout Standard
5233 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 \begin_layout Standard
5241 The following information applies to all section headings:
5244 \begin_layout Itemize
5245 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5248 \begin_layout Itemize
5249 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5252 \begin_layout Itemize
5253 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5256 \begin_layout Itemize
5257 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5260 \begin_layout Subsection
5264 \begin_layout Standard
5266 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5280 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5281 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5282 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5283 the text they contain.
5284 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5292 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5295 \begin_layout Standard
5296 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5305 when you start a new paragraph.
5306 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5310 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5311 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5312 have to change back to the
5316 environment yourself.
5319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5328 \begin_inset Index idx
5331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5341 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5342 time for the differences.
5351 are identical except for one difference:
5355 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5364 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5368 Here's an example of the
5381 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5383 See – no indentation!
5387 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5388 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5389 the other paragraph.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 Here's another example, this time in the
5400 \begin_layout Quotation
5406 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5407 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5408 the first line, then
5412 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5416 you were quoting other text.
5419 \begin_layout Quotation
5420 Here's a new paragraph.
5421 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5422 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 As the examples show,
5430 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5431 They should put quotes in the
5436 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5440 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5443 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5445 \begin_inset Index idx
5448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5455 \begin_inset Index idx
5458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_layout Standard
5479 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5485 \begin_inset Newline newline
5488 Which I did not rehearse!
5492 It could be much worse.
5493 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5495 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5496 indented a bit more than the first.
5497 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5503 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 And make things look fine
5507 \begin_inset Newline newline
5513 arg "newline-insert newline"
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5524 does not indent both margins.
5525 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5526 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5529 arg "newline-insert newline"
5535 \begin_layout Subsection
5537 \begin_inset Index idx
5540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5556 \begin_layout Standard
5558 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5568 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5569 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5578 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5579 lets you provide your own label.
5580 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5581 describing some general features of all four of them.
5584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5588 \begin_layout Standard
5589 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5591 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5592 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5601 reset the environment to
5605 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5606 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5607 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5611 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5615 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5622 \begin_layout Standard
5623 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5624 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5625 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5627 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5628 you read all of section
5629 \begin_inset space ~
5633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5635 reference "sec:Nesting"
5642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5644 \begin_inset Index idx
5647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5663 \begin_layout Standard
5664 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5668 paragraph environment.
5669 It has the following properties:
5672 \begin_layout Itemize
5673 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5677 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 The items can have any length.
5690 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5691 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 environment inside another
5707 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5711 \begin_layout Itemize
5712 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5715 \begin_layout Itemize
5717 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5720 \begin_layout Itemize
5722 \begin_inset space ~
5726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5728 reference "sec:Nesting"
5732 for a full explanation of nesting.
5736 \begin_layout Standard
5737 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5746 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5751 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5754 \begin_layout Itemize
5755 The label for the first level
5759 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5763 \begin_layout Itemize
5764 The label for the second level is a dash.
5768 \begin_layout Itemize
5769 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5773 \begin_layout Itemize
5774 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5778 \begin_layout Itemize
5779 Back out to the third level.
5783 \begin_layout Itemize
5784 Back to the second level.
5788 \begin_layout Itemize
5789 Back to the outermost level.
5792 \begin_layout Standard
5793 These are the default labels for an
5798 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5803 dialog in the submenu
5808 \begin_inset Index idx
5811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5817 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5821 \begin_layout Standard
5822 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5823 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5825 \begin_inset space ~
5829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5831 reference "sec:Nesting"
5838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5840 \begin_inset Index idx
5843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5852 name "sec:Enumerate"
5859 \begin_layout Standard
5864 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5865 It has these properties:
5868 \begin_layout Enumerate
5869 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5873 \begin_layout Enumerate
5874 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5878 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5888 environment resets the counter to one.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5904 \begin_layout Enumerate
5905 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5906 Items can have any length.
5909 \begin_layout Enumerate
5910 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5913 \begin_layout Enumerate
5914 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5917 \begin_layout Enumerate
5918 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5922 \begin_layout Standard
5931 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5933 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5934 labels the four different levels in an
5941 \begin_layout Enumerate
5942 The first level of an
5946 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5950 \begin_layout Enumerate
5951 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5955 \begin_layout Enumerate
5956 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5960 \begin_layout Enumerate
5961 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5964 \begin_layout Enumerate
5965 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5970 \begin_layout Enumerate
5971 Back to the third level
5975 \begin_layout Enumerate
5976 Back to the second level.
5980 \begin_layout Enumerate
5981 Back to the outermost level.
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5985 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5989 environment, see section
5990 \begin_inset space ~
5994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5996 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6001 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6006 There is more to nesting
6010 environments than we've stated here.
6011 You should read section
6012 \begin_inset space ~
6016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6018 reference "sec:Nesting"
6022 to learn more about nesting.
6025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6027 \begin_inset Index idx
6030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6039 \begin_layout Standard
6040 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6044 list has no fixed label.
6045 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6054 of the first line as the label.
6058 \begin_layout Description
6059 Example: This is an example of the
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6068 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6072 \begin_layout Standard
6074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6081 it is meant that the first usage of the
6085 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6087 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6095 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6103 \begin_inset space ~
6109 \begin_inset space ~
6113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6115 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6119 for more information.) Here is an example:
6122 \begin_layout Description
6124 \begin_inset space ~
6127 Example: This one shows how to use a
6130 \begin_inset space ~
6142 \begin_layout Description
6143 Usage: You should use the
6147 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6148 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6150 It's not a good idea to use a
6154 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6155 You're better off using
6167 paragraphs into them.
6170 \begin_layout Description
6171 Nesting: You can nest
6175 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6179 \begin_layout Standard
6180 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6181 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6182 them from the first line.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6204 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6205 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6218 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6220 Here are its properties:
6223 \begin_layout Labeling
6224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6226 \begin_inset space ~
6229 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6238 of each line as the item label.
6243 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6244 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6245 space as described above.
6248 \begin_layout Labeling
6249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6250 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6251 uses different margins for the item label and the
6252 body of the item text.
6253 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6254 label width plus a little extra space.
6258 \begin_layout Labeling
6259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6261 \begin_inset space ~
6264 width \SpecialChar LyX
6265 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6266 If the label width is larger, the label
6267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6274 into the first line.
6275 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6276 margin of the rest of the item text.
6279 \begin_layout Labeling
6280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6282 \begin_inset space ~
6285 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6290 environment has the same left margin.
6291 \begin_inset Newline newline
6294 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6299 \begin_inset space ~
6304 dialog (toolbar button
6307 arg "layout-paragraph"
6314 \begin_inset space ~
6319 determines the default label width.
6320 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6329 multiple times instead.
6330 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6340 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6343 \begin_inset space ~
6348 every time you alter a label in a
6353 \begin_inset Newline newline
6356 The predefined default width is the length of
6357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6365 \begin_inset space ~
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6376 list the same way as the
6380 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6386 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6390 \begin_layout Standard
6395 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6396 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6398 \begin_inset space ~
6402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6404 reference "sec:Nesting"
6408 to learn about nesting.
6411 \begin_layout Standard
6412 There is yet another feature of the
6416 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6417 left-justifies the item labels by
6419 You can use additional
6423 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6424 justifies the item label.
6429 are documented in section
6430 \begin_inset space ~
6434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6436 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6441 Here are some examples:
6444 \begin_layout Labeling
6445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6446 Left The default for
6453 \begin_layout Labeling
6454 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6462 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6465 \begin_layout Labeling
6466 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6467 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6471 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6478 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6481 \begin_layout Subsection
6483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6485 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6490 \begin_inset Index idx
6493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6502 \begin_layout Standard
6503 The features described in this section require that the module
6505 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6507 is loaded in the document settings.
6508 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6514 \begin_inset Index idx
6517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6519 -packages ! enumitem
6527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6528 Custom Enumerate Lists
6529 \begin_inset Index idx
6532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6533 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6541 \begin_layout Standard
6543 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6549 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6550 There you add the command
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6561 \begin_layout Standard
6573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6574 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6575 Code, look at section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6595 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6602 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6603 For capital Roman numerals replace
6615 in the command above.
6616 For Arabic numerals use
6624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6631 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6646 \begin_layout Standard
6648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 You can only number 26
6657 \begin_inset space ~
6660 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6668 \begin_layout Standard
6669 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6670 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6673 \begin_layout Standard
6674 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6677 \begin_layout Enumerate
6678 \begin_inset Argument 1
6681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6707 \begin_layout Enumerate
6708 \begin_inset Argument 1
6711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 \begin_layout Enumerate
6739 \begin_layout Enumerate
6740 \begin_inset Argument 1
6743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6767 \begin_layout Enumerate
6768 \begin_inset Argument 1
6771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6797 \begin_layout Standard
6798 For this list these commands were used:
6801 \begin_layout Standard
6812 \begin_inset Newline newline
6820 \begin_inset Newline newline
6828 \begin_inset Newline newline
6838 \begin_layout Standard
6845 makes the label emphasized and
6854 \begin_layout Standard
6855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6863 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6864 lists until you change the definition.
6872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6874 \begin_inset Index idx
6877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6886 \begin_layout Standard
6887 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6890 \begin_layout Enumerate
6891 \begin_inset Argument 1
6894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_inset Note Note
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6917 goes back to default numbering
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_layout Standard
6933 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6938 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6943 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6944 to indicate that it is a resumed
6945 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6946 , but in the output.
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6970 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6971 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6972 of a normal enumeration.
6973 There, insert the command
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6982 \begin_layout Standard
6987 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6991 \begin_layout Enumerate
6995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7000 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7003 \begin_layout Enumerate
7004 \begin_inset Argument 1
7007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 This enumeration starts at 4
7026 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7028 \begin_inset Index idx
7031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 \begin_layout Standard
7041 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7043 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7046 \begin_layout Itemize
7050 \begin_layout Itemize
7051 with standard spacing
7054 \begin_layout Standard
7055 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7057 Add there the command
7061 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7064 \begin_layout Itemize
7065 \begin_inset Argument 1
7068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7087 \begin_layout Itemize
7091 \begin_layout Itemize
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_inset Index idx
7106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7108 -packages ! enumitem
7114 For more information see its documentation,
7115 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7124 \begin_layout Standard
7125 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7127 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7128 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7132 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7135 \begin_layout Enumerate
7136 \begin_inset Argument 1
7139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7160 \begin_layout Enumerate
7161 with negative indentation
7164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7165 Further Customization
7166 \begin_inset Index idx
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 Lists ! Customization
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7179 You can also change the style of description lists.
7183 \begin_layout Standard
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 changes the description label font, the command
7193 \begin_layout Standard
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7200 sets the list style.
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 An example where the command
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7212 itshape, style=nextline
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7219 \begin_layout Description
7221 \begin_inset space ~
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7236 itshape, style=nextline
7246 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7247 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7251 \begin_layout Description
7253 \begin_inset space ~
7256 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7257 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7258 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7261 \begin_layout Standard
7262 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7268 \begin_inset Index idx
7271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7273 -packages ! enumitem
7279 For more information see its documentation
7280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7289 \begin_layout Subsection
7291 \begin_inset Index idx
7294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7305 \begin_inset space ~
7308 Address: An Overview
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7312 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7313 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7321 \begin_inset space ~
7327 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7328 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7329 gags on the document.
7330 In contrast, you can use the
7337 \begin_inset space ~
7342 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7343 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 Of course, you're not limited to using
7355 \begin_inset space ~
7364 \begin_inset space ~
7369 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7370 some European academic papers.
7373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7377 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7384 \begin_layout Standard
7389 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7390 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7394 \begin_inset space ~
7399 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7400 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7401 Here's an example of each:
7404 \begin_layout Right Address
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7410 \begin_inset Newline newline
7414 \begin_inset Newline newline
7417 When is it? What is today?
7420 \begin_layout Standard
7424 \begin_inset space ~
7430 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7432 the largest block of text on a single line.
7433 Here's an example of the
7440 \begin_layout Address
7442 \begin_inset Newline newline
7445 Where do I send this
7446 \begin_inset Newline newline
7449 Your post office and country
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 As you can see, both
7460 \begin_inset space ~
7465 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7470 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7471 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7477 This makes sense, since
7485 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7486 Thus, you have to use
7493 arg "newline-insert newline"
7498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7505 \begin_inset space ~
7510 ) to start a new line in an
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7525 \begin_layout Subsection
7529 \begin_layout Standard
7530 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7531 or list of references.
7533 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset Index idx
7541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7550 \begin_layout Standard
7555 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7556 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7557 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7558 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7572 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7573 The book document classes ignores the
7577 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7581 in a letter document class.
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7589 environment does several things for you.
7590 First, it puts the centered label
7591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7599 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7601 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7602 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7603 the subsequent text.
7604 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7606 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7611 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7615 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7616 The new paragraph will still be in the
7621 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7622 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7625 \begin_layout Standard
7626 \begin_inset Float figure
7631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7633 \begin_inset Graphics
7634 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7642 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7647 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7668 \begin_layout Standard
7669 We would love to demonstrate the
7673 environment, but since this document is in the
7674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7681 class, we can't do this.
7682 We inserted it therefore as figure
7683 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7689 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7694 If you have never heard of an
7695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7702 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7705 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7707 \begin_inset Index idx
7710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7726 \begin_layout Standard
7731 environment is used to list references.
7732 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7733 only use it at the end of the document.
7745 \begin_layout Standard
7746 When you first open a
7750 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7751 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7767 depending on the document class.
7768 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7769 Each paragraph of the
7773 environment is a bibliography entry.
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 Each new paragraph is still in the
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7788 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7790 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7792 handling, have a look at section
7793 \begin_inset space ~
7797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7799 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7806 \begin_layout Subsection
7807 Special Environments
7810 \begin_layout Standard
7812 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7813 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7821 \begin_inset Index idx
7824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7834 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7841 \begin_layout Standard
7847 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7849 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7854 key as a fixed whitespace.
7858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7871 \begin_inset space ~
7876 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7894 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7897 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7900 arg "newline-insert newline"
7917 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7918 So, when you finish using the
7923 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7924 Also, you can nest the
7929 environment inside of others.
7932 \begin_layout Standard
7933 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7936 \begin_layout Itemize
7940 arg "newline-insert newline"
7943 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7948 \begin_inset space \space{}
7958 arg "newline-insert newline"
7964 \begin_layout Itemize
7968 arg "newline-insert newline"
7978 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7984 \begin_layout Itemize
7985 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7986 You must put at least one
7990 in any line you want blank.
7991 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7995 \begin_layout Itemize
7996 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8000 since that will insert
8005 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8008 arg "self-insert \""
8014 \begin_layout Standard
8018 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8022 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8026 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8030 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8034 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8035 printf("Hello World!
8040 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8044 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8048 \begin_layout Standard
8049 This is just the standard
8050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8061 \begin_layout Standard
8067 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8069 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8070 as if you used a typewriter.
8071 \begin_inset Index idx
8074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8075 Paragraph environments|)
8080 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8083 Program Code Listings
8088 \begin_inset space ~
8096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8100 \begin_inset Index idx
8103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8112 \begin_layout Standard
8117 environment is similar to the
8122 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8123 computer console text.
8128 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8142 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8143 you can have empty lines.
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 have a certain language and a text style
8160 \begin_layout Itemize
8161 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8162 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8163 and \SpecialChar TeX
8167 \begin_layout Standard
8168 Because of these properties
8172 works like a typewriter.
8176 \begin_layout Verbatim
8181 \begin_layout Verbatim
8185 The following 2 lines are empty:
8188 \begin_layout Verbatim
8192 \begin_layout Verbatim
8196 \begin_layout Verbatim
8198 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8203 \begin_layout Standard
8208 environment is identical to
8212 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8213 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8220 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8225 \begin_layout Section
8226 Nesting Environments
8227 \begin_inset Index idx
8230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8231 Nesting ! Environments
8237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8246 \begin_layout Subsection
8250 \begin_layout Standard
8252 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8254 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8256 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8258 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8270 \begin_layout Enumerate
8274 \begin_layout Enumerate
8279 \begin_layout Enumerate
8283 \begin_layout Enumerate
8288 \begin_layout Enumerate
8292 \begin_layout Standard
8293 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8294 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8296 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8298 \begin_inset space ~
8302 \begin_inset space ~
8310 \begin_inset space ~
8314 \begin_inset space ~
8319 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8321 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8324 arg "depth-increment"
8330 arg "depth-decrement"
8344 arg "depth-increment"
8350 arg "depth-decrement"
8354 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8355 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8361 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8362 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8363 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8364 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8367 \begin_layout Standard
8368 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8370 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8372 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8375 \begin_layout Subsection
8376 What You Can and Can't Nest
8379 \begin_layout Standard
8380 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8381 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8384 \begin_layout Standard
8385 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8386 than a simple yes or no.
8387 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8390 \begin_layout Itemize
8391 Completely unnestable
8394 \begin_layout Itemize
8395 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8399 \begin_layout Itemize
8400 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8404 \begin_layout Standard
8405 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8406 environments have them:
8409 \begin_layout Description
8410 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8411 Can't nest into them.
8415 \begin_layout Itemize
8421 \begin_layout Itemize
8427 \begin_layout Itemize
8433 \begin_layout Itemize
8439 \begin_layout Itemize
8446 \begin_layout Description
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8451 Nestable You can nest them.
8452 You can nest other things into them.
8456 \begin_layout Itemize
8462 \begin_layout Itemize
8468 \begin_layout Itemize
8474 \begin_layout Itemize
8480 \begin_layout Itemize
8486 \begin_layout Itemize
8492 \begin_layout Itemize
8498 \begin_layout Itemize
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8511 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 \begin_layout Description
8519 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8520 You can't nest anything into them.
8524 \begin_layout Itemize
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8612 \begin_layout Itemize
8619 \begin_layout Standard
8620 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8628 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8638 \begin_inset space ~
8641 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8642 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8643 nested section headings violate this.
8651 \begin_layout Subsection
8652 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8653 \begin_inset Index idx
8656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8657 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8665 \begin_layout Standard
8666 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8667 affected by nesting anyhow.
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8675 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Standard
8685 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8693 Figures and tables in
8697 are not affected by this.
8702 Have a look at section
8703 \begin_inset space ~
8707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8709 reference "sec:Floats"
8713 for more information about
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8722 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8723 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8727 \begin_layout Standard
8728 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8736 of its own, it behaves just like a
8737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8744 paragraph environment.
8745 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8749 \begin_layout Standard
8750 Here's an example with a table:
8753 \begin_layout Enumerate
8758 \begin_layout Enumerate
8759 This is (a) and it's nested.
8763 \begin_layout Standard
8764 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8770 \begin_layout Standard
8772 \begin_inset Tabular
8773 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8774 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8775 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8776 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8861 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8868 \begin_layout Enumerate
8870 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8874 \begin_layout Enumerate
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8879 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8882 \begin_layout Enumerate
8887 \begin_layout Enumerate
8888 This is (a) and it's nested.
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8893 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8901 \begin_inset Tabular
8902 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8903 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8904 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8905 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8989 \begin_layout Standard
8990 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8996 \begin_layout Enumerate
9003 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9006 \begin_layout Enumerate
9010 \begin_layout Standard
9011 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9015 \begin_layout Standard
9016 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9019 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9022 \begin_layout Enumerate
9027 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 This is (a) and it's nested.
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9032 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9040 \begin_inset Tabular
9041 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9042 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9043 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9044 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9129 \begin_layout Standard
9130 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9136 \begin_layout Enumerate
9138 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9145 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 \begin_layout Standard
9150 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9156 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9157 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9161 \begin_layout Subsection
9162 Usage and General Features
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9166 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9167 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9176 is the innermost possible depth.
9177 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9181 level #1 – outermost
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9195 \begin_layout Enumerate
9200 \begin_layout Itemize
9205 \begin_layout Itemize
9214 \begin_layout Standard
9215 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9216 both of them in the example.
9217 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9227 For example, if we tried to nest another
9232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9239 , we would get errors.
9242 \begin_layout Subsection
9244 \begin_inset Index idx
9247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9256 \begin_layout Standard
9257 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9258 We have several examples of nested environments.
9259 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9264 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9267 \begin_layout Labeling
9268 \labelwidthstring MMM
9269 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9278 \begin_layout Labeling
9279 \labelwidthstring MMM
9280 #2-a This is level #2.
9281 We created it by using
9284 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9290 arg "depth-increment"
9297 \begin_layout Labeling
9298 \labelwidthstring MMM
9299 #3-a This is level #3.
9300 This time, we just enter
9307 arg "depth-increment"
9311 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9315 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9321 arg "depth-increment"
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9333 environment, nested inside of
9334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9342 So, it's at level #4.
9343 We did this by entering
9346 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9352 arg "depth-increment"
9355 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9360 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9376 \begin_layout Standard
9381 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9384 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9390 \begin_layout Labeling
9391 \labelwidthstring MMM
9392 #4-a This is level #4.
9396 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9399 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9404 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9408 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9413 keep nesting things inside
9414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9432 \begin_layout Labeling
9433 \labelwidthstring MMM
9434 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9435 and this is level #6.
9436 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #5-b Back to level #5.
9446 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9452 arg "depth-decrement"
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9464 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9470 arg "depth-decrement"
9473 , we're back at level #4.
9477 \begin_layout Labeling
9478 \labelwidthstring MMM
9479 #3-b Back to level #3.
9480 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9484 \begin_layout Labeling
9485 \labelwidthstring MMM
9486 #2-b Back to level #2.
9491 \begin_layout Labeling
9492 \labelwidthstring MMM
9493 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9494 After this sentence, we will enter
9498 and change the paragraph environment back to
9505 \begin_layout Standard
9506 We could have also used the
9522 environment in place of the
9527 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9531 Example 2: Inheritance
9534 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9535 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9538 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9547 arg "depth-increment"
9551 \begin_inset Newline newline
9554 which, we will change to the
9562 \begin_layout Enumerate
9567 environment, at level #2.
9570 \begin_layout Enumerate
9571 Notice how the nested
9575 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9579 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9583 \begin_layout Standard
9584 We ended this example by entering
9589 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9593 and reset the nesting depth by using
9596 arg "depth-decrement"
9602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9603 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9612 \begin_inset Argument 1
9615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9616 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9624 \begin_layout Enumerate
9625 This is level #1, in an
9629 paragraph environment.
9630 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9634 \begin_layout Enumerate
9639 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9645 arg "depth-increment"
9649 Now, what happens if we nest an
9653 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9654 label be? An asterisk?
9658 \begin_layout Itemize
9668 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9669 So, its label is a bullet.
9670 (We got here by using
9673 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9679 arg "depth-increment"
9682 , then changing the environment to
9690 \begin_layout Itemize
9691 Here's level #4, produced using
9694 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9700 arg "depth-increment"
9704 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9709 \begin_layout Enumerate
9712 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9717 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9721 , because we are in the
9729 environment (that is, it is an
9744 \begin_layout Enumerate
9749 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9750 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9754 \begin_layout Enumerate
9755 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9758 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9761 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9764 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 arg "depth-decrement"
9771 to decrease the depth after the next
9774 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9788 \begin_layout Enumerate
9790 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9791 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9795 \begin_layout Enumerate
9796 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9805 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9810 reset the counter for the label.
9814 \begin_layout Enumerate
9818 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9824 arg "depth-decrement"
9827 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9828 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9829 into the twofold-nested
9837 \begin_layout Enumerate
9838 The same thing happens if we do another
9841 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9847 arg "depth-decrement"
9850 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9853 \begin_layout Standard
9854 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9859 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9874 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9881 The same rule applies for the
9885 environment, as well.
9888 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9889 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9892 \begin_layout Enumerate
9893 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9894 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9895 the same detail with how we did it.
9904 \begin_layout Standard
9912 arg "depth-increment"
9919 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9920 the example in parentheses someplace.
9921 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9922 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9923 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9937 Now we will add verse.
9938 \begin_inset Newline newline
9941 It will get much worse.
9942 \begin_inset Newline newline
9952 arg "depth-increment"
9963 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9964 \begin_inset Newline newline
9967 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9968 \begin_inset Newline newline
9974 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9987 \begin_layout Standard
9988 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9994 \begin_layout Standard
9996 \begin_inset Tabular
9997 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9998 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9999 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10000 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10085 \begin_layout Verse
10089 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10099 arg "depth-increment"
10105 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10111 \begin_inset Newline newline
10119 arg "depth-decrement"
10126 \begin_layout Enumerate
10131 : level #1) This is another item.
10132 Note that selecting a
10136 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10137 3 times to put the table inside the
10145 \begin_layout Quotation
10146 We're now ending the
10150 list and changing to
10155 We're still at level #1.
10156 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10157 The next set of paragraphs is a
10158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10165 We will nest both the
10172 \begin_inset space ~
10177 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10181 for the letter body.
10185 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10188 to preserve the depth.
10189 Remember that you need to use
10192 arg "newline-insert newline"
10195 to create multiple lines inside the
10202 \begin_inset space ~
10212 \begin_layout Right Address
10214 \begin_inset Newline newline
10217 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10218 \begin_inset Newline newline
10224 \begin_layout Address
10226 \begin_inset space ~
10232 \begin_layout Quotation
10233 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10237 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10238 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10239 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10240 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10241 as soon as possible.
10242 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10245 \begin_layout Quotation
10246 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10247 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10248 with your order, along with payment.
10251 \begin_layout Quotation
10252 We thank you again for your patience.
10255 \begin_layout Address
10257 \begin_inset Newline newline
10264 \begin_layout Quotation
10265 That ends that example!
10268 \begin_layout Standard
10269 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10270 gives you a lot of power with just
10272 We could have easily nested an
10293 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10296 \begin_layout Subsection
10298 \begin_inset Index idx
10301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10302 Nesting ! Separation
10308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10310 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10317 \begin_layout Standard
10318 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10320 For example you need two different enumerations:
10323 \begin_layout Enumerate
10328 \begin_layout Enumerate
10333 \begin_layout Enumerate
10337 \begin_layout Standard
10338 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10344 \begin_layout Itemize
10350 \begin_layout Standard
10351 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10357 \begin_layout Enumerate
10361 \begin_layout Enumerate
10365 \begin_layout Enumerate
10369 \begin_layout Standard
10370 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10371 list item and use the menu
10373 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10374 Start New Environment
10377 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10379 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10382 arg "paragraph-break"
10386 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10387 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10388 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10389 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10392 \begin_layout Standard
10393 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10396 arg "paragraph-break"
10399 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10402 \begin_layout Section
10403 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10404 \begin_inset Index idx
10407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10416 \begin_layout Standard
10417 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10418 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10420 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10421 be broken at the end of a line.
10422 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10426 \begin_layout Subsection
10428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10430 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10435 \begin_inset Index idx
10438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10447 \begin_layout Standard
10448 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10449 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10450 ) not to break the line at
10452 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10455 \begin_layout Quote
10456 Further documentation is given in section
10457 \begin_inset Newline newline
10461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10463 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10471 \begin_layout Standard
10472 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10487 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10496 A protected space is set with
10498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10501 \begin_inset space ~
10509 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10515 \begin_layout Subsection
10517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10519 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10524 \begin_inset Index idx
10527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10528 Spacing ! Horizontal
10536 \begin_layout Standard
10537 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 The length units are listed in Appendix
10545 \begin_inset space ~
10549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10551 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10558 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10562 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10567 \begin_inset Index idx
10570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10571 Spaces ! Inter-word
10579 \begin_layout Standard
10580 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10581 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10582 at the ends of sentences.
10583 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10584 automatically takes care about this.
10585 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10586 followed by a period; see section
10587 \begin_inset space ~
10591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10593 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10598 To insert a normal space, select
10600 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10601 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10603 \begin_inset space ~
10611 arg "space-insert normal"
10617 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10621 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10626 \begin_inset Index idx
10629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10656 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10657 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10658 inside abbreviations:
10661 \begin_layout Quote
10663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10667 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10670 \begin_layout Standard
10671 or between values and units.
10672 Compare for example this:
10673 \begin_inset Newline newline
10677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10681 \begin_inset Newline newline
10684 10 kg (normal space
10687 \begin_layout Standard
10688 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10691 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10693 \begin_inset space ~
10701 arg "space-insert thin"
10707 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10711 \begin_layout Standard
10712 You can also insert the following space types:
10715 \begin_layout Description
10717 \begin_inset space ~
10721 \begin_inset space ~
10724 space A line with a
10725 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10729 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10733 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10736 negative thin space between the arrows.
10739 \begin_layout Description
10741 \begin_inset space ~
10745 \begin_inset space ~
10748 space A line with a
10749 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10753 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10757 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10760 negative medium space between the arrows.
10763 \begin_layout Description
10765 \begin_inset space ~
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10772 space A line with a
10773 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10777 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10781 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10784 negative thick space between the arrows.
10787 \begin_layout Description
10789 \begin_inset space ~
10793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10797 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10801 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10805 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10809 \begin_inset space ~
10813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10816 em) space between the arrows.
10819 \begin_layout Description
10821 \begin_inset space ~
10825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10829 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10833 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10837 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10841 \begin_inset space ~
10845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10848 em) space between the arrows.
10851 \begin_layout Description
10853 \begin_inset space ~
10857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10861 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10865 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10869 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10873 \begin_inset space ~
10877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10880 em) space between the arrows.
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10893 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10898 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10905 cm space between the arrows.
10908 \begin_layout Standard
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10916 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10920 lists the different space sizes.
10923 \begin_layout Standard
10924 \begin_inset Float table
10929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10930 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10935 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10939 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10949 \begin_inset Tabular
10950 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10951 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10952 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10953 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11069 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11228 \begin_inset Index idx
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11240 \begin_layout Standard
11241 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11242 feature for adding extra space
11243 in a uniform fashion.
11244 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11245 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11246 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11247 equally between themselves.
11250 \begin_layout Standard
11251 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11254 \begin_layout Quote
11256 This is on the left side
11257 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11260 This is on the right
11263 \begin_layout Quote
11266 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11270 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11276 \begin_layout Quote
11279 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11283 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11287 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11293 \begin_layout Standard
11294 That was an example in the
11300 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11304 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11308 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11311 is one in a standard paragraph.
11312 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11316 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11320 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11323 \begin_inset space ~
11328 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11331 \begin_layout Standard
11333 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11337 \begin_inset space ~
11343 \begin_layout Standard
11345 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11349 \begin_inset space ~
11355 \begin_layout Standard
11357 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11361 \begin_inset space ~
11367 \begin_layout Standard
11369 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11373 \begin_inset space ~
11379 \begin_layout Standard
11381 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11385 \begin_inset space ~
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11393 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11397 \begin_inset space ~
11403 \begin_layout Standard
11404 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11412 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11416 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11418 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11419 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11423 option in the space dialog.
11431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11435 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11440 \begin_inset Index idx
11443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11452 \begin_layout Standard
11453 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11454 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11457 \begin_layout Standard
11458 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11461 What is correct English?:
11462 \begin_inset Newline newline
11466 \begin_inset Newline newline
11470 \begin_inset space ~
11473 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11474 \begin_inset Newline newline
11478 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11489 \begin_inset Newline newline
11493 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11504 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11529 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11532 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11536 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_inset space ~
11550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11553 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11562 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11563 That is why it is named
11564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11572 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11573 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11577 \begin_layout Subsection
11579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11581 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11586 \begin_inset Index idx
11589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11598 \begin_layout Standard
11599 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11602 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11604 \begin_inset space ~
11610 There you find the following sizes:
11613 \begin_layout Standard
11626 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11627 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11632 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11635 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11637 \begin_inset space ~
11643 \begin_inset Index idx
11646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11647 Document ! Settings
11652 for the paragraph separation.
11653 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11664 \begin_layout Standard
11670 \begin_inset Index idx
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11679 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11680 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11685 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11686 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11695 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11704 s are described in section
11705 \begin_inset space ~
11709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11711 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11720 If there are several
11724 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11725 You can therefore use
11729 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11732 \begin_layout Standard
11737 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11738 \begin_inset space ~
11742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11744 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11751 \begin_layout Standard
11752 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11762 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11763 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11775 \begin_layout Subsection
11776 Paragraph Alignment
11777 \begin_inset Index idx
11780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11781 Paragraph ! Alignment
11789 \begin_layout Standard
11790 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11792 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11795 dialog (toolbar button
11798 arg "layout-paragraph"
11802 There are five possibilities:
11805 \begin_layout Itemize
11813 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11819 \begin_layout Itemize
11827 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11833 \begin_layout Itemize
11841 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11847 \begin_layout Itemize
11855 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11861 \begin_layout Itemize
11869 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11875 \begin_layout Standard
11876 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11877 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11878 the left and right margins.
11879 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11882 \begin_layout Standard
11884 This paragraph is right aligned,
11887 \begin_layout Standard
11889 this one is centered,
11892 \begin_layout Standard
11894 this one is left aligned.
11897 \begin_layout Subsection
11899 \begin_inset Index idx
11902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11903 Page breaks ! Forced
11909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11911 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11918 \begin_layout Standard
11919 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11920 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11921 force a page break where you want one.
11922 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11923 is good at page breaking.
11924 Only if you use a lot of
11928 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11929 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11932 \begin_layout Standard
11933 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11934 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11938 have to change the page breaking.
11941 \begin_layout Standard
11942 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11944 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11947 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 \begin_inset space ~
11955 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11958 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11960 \begin_inset space ~
11965 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11967 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11968 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11971 \begin_layout Standard
11972 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11973 at the top of a page.
11974 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11976 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11977 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11978 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11982 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11986 to learn more about
11993 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11997 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12002 \begin_inset Index idx
12005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12006 Page breaks ! Clear
12014 \begin_layout Standard
12015 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12016 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12017 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12018 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12019 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12022 \begin_layout Standard
12023 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12026 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12028 \begin_inset space ~
12034 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12037 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12039 \begin_inset space ~
12043 \begin_inset space ~
12048 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12049 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12052 \begin_layout Subsection
12054 \begin_inset Index idx
12057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12066 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12074 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12076 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12079 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12081 \begin_inset space ~
12085 \begin_inset space ~
12093 arg "newline-insert newline"
12097 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12100 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12102 \begin_inset space ~
12106 \begin_inset space ~
12114 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12117 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12119 This is useful to avoid
12120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12127 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12130 \begin_layout Standard
12131 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12132 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12134 very good at line breaking.
12135 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12136 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12137 \begin_inset space ~
12141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12143 reference "sec:Quote"
12148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12150 reference "sec:Verse"
12155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12157 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12164 \begin_layout Subsection
12166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12168 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12173 \begin_inset Index idx
12176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12185 \begin_layout Standard
12187 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12198 \begin_layout Standard
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12210 you can insert horizontal lines.
12211 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12212 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12213 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12216 \begin_layout Standard
12218 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12229 \begin_layout Section
12230 Characters and Symbols
12233 \begin_layout Standard
12234 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12235 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12236 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12244 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12248 for information on how this is done.
12251 \begin_layout Standard
12252 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12257 dialog via the menu
12259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12260 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 \begin_layout Standard
12267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12275 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12276 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12278 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12286 \begin_layout Section
12287 Fonts and Text Styles
12288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12290 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12297 \begin_layout Subsection
12299 \begin_inset Index idx
12302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12311 \begin_layout Standard
12312 There are two types of fonts:
12315 \begin_layout Description
12317 \begin_inset space ~
12321 \begin_inset Index idx
12324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12330 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12335 characters) in the font.
12336 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12337 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12338 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12339 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12340 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12341 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12342 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12343 \begin_inset Newline newline
12346 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12347 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12348 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12349 sizes than at small ones.
12350 \begin_inset Newline newline
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12372 \begin_layout Description
12374 \begin_inset space ~
12378 \begin_inset Index idx
12381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12387 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12388 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12389 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12390 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12391 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12392 image manipulation program.
12393 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12394 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12398 pixels high up to 34
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12402 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12403 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12404 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12406 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12407 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12408 \begin_inset Newline newline
12411 Bitmap fonts are named
12414 \begin_inset space ~
12419 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12424 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12425 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12426 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12427 use scalable fonts.
12430 \begin_layout Standard
12431 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12434 \begin_layout Standard
12435 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12436 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12437 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12438 font to emphasize text, you use an
12439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12447 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12449 In \SpecialChar LyX
12450 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12454 \begin_layout Subsection
12457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12459 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12466 \begin_layout Standard
12467 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12468 used its own fonts.
12469 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12470 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12473 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12474 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12475 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12476 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12477 to a word processor.
12478 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12479 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12480 files are very portable across
12481 different machines.
12482 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12483 has increased a lot
12484 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12487 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12489 \begin_inset space ~
12493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12495 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12500 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12501 code in the document
12502 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12505 \begin_layout Standard
12506 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12507 engines that are also able directly
12508 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12510 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12512 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12514 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12515 that is installed on your system.
12516 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12519 \begin_layout Standard
12520 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12528 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12529 es; so you might have to experiment.
12537 \begin_layout Standard
12538 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12547 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12548 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12549 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12550 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12559 \begin_layout Subsection
12560 Document Font and Font size
12561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12563 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12568 \begin_inset Index idx
12571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12578 \begin_inset Index idx
12581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12590 \begin_layout Standard
12591 You can set the document fonts in the
12593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12597 \begin_inset Index idx
12600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12601 Document ! Settings
12611 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12612 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12615 \begin_inset space ~
12624 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12626 \begin_inset space ~
12629 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12637 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12638 This requires that you use
12650 as the output format, i.
12651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12655 \begin_inset space \space{}
12658 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12659 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12660 installed (see section
12661 \begin_inset space ~
12665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12667 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12672 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12674 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12675 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12677 \begin_inset space ~
12680 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12681 cannot determine the family.
12682 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12683 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12686 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12691 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12696 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12702 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12703 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12711 \begin_inset space ~
12717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12730 European Computer Modern
12733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12740 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12743 \begin_layout Standard
12752 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12753 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12758 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12766 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12772 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12773 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12776 \begin_layout Itemize
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12785 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12798 \begin_inset space ~
12803 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12804 community in order to replace
12808 as the default font.
12809 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12810 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12813 \begin_inset space ~
12826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12827 One difference is improved kerning.
12835 \begin_layout Itemize
12839 \begin_inset space ~
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12848 fonts in (the rare) case that
12851 \begin_inset space ~
12856 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12871 Virtual means that it
12872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12883 -glyphs from other fonts.
12884 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12906 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12912 \begin_inset Index idx
12915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12917 -packages ! aeguill
12922 with the document preamble line
12923 \begin_inset Newline newline
12930 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12931 \begin_inset Newline newline
12936 will fix the guillemet problem.
12941 and that accented characters are not
12945 glyph, but built of
12949 characters, the accent and the letter.
12950 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12956 If you search for example for the French word
12957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12964 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12973 and not for the glyph
12974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12978 \begin_inset space ~
12982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12988 \begin_layout Itemize
12989 If you do not like the look of
12997 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13002 \begin_inset space ~
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13018 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13022 serif and typewriter fonts,
13026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13027 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13034 \begin_inset space ~
13043 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13048 \begin_inset space \space{}
13056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13060 \begin_inset space \space{}
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13074 \begin_inset space ~
13084 but you can also select your own.
13085 \begin_inset Newline newline
13088 The differences between roman,
13091 \begin_inset space ~
13100 fonts are explained in section
13101 \begin_inset space ~
13105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13107 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13112 \begin_inset Newline newline
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13123 was originally designed for newspapers.
13124 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13125 into the small newspaper columns.
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13134 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13137 \begin_layout Standard
13138 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13151 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13156 depends on the class you are using.
13157 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13160 \begin_layout Standard
13161 Note that the font size is the
13166 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13167 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13168 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13169 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13178 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13179 \begin_inset space ~
13183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13185 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13192 \begin_layout Standard
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13201 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13203 \begin_inset space ~
13206 serif or typewriter.
13211 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13221 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13224 \begin_layout Standard
13229 LaTeX font encoding
13231 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13232 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13238 \begin_inset Index idx
13241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13243 -packages ! fontenc
13249 \begin_inset space ~
13253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13255 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13260 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13261 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13268 \begin_layout Standard
13269 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13271 Use Old Style Figures
13275 Use True Small Caps
13278 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13281 Use Old Style Figures
13283 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13285 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13293 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13297 Use True Small Caps
13299 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13300 of scaled capitals.
13301 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13302 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13305 \begin_layout Standard
13310 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13311 a font to display the script characters.
13315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13316 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13322 \begin_inset Index idx
13325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13332 So this has no effect for the document language
13346 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13350 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13358 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13363 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13364 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13366 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13368 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13371 dialog, see section
13372 \begin_inset space ~
13376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13378 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13390 \begin_layout Subsection
13394 \begin_layout Standard
13395 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13396 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13398 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13399 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13400 choose a math font in the dialog
13402 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13406 \begin_inset Index idx
13409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13410 Document ! Settings
13416 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13417 automatically selects a math font.
13418 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13419 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13428 \begin_inset space ~
13434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13439 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13440 document font is available.
13443 \begin_layout Standard
13444 Note that the math font will not be used for
13448 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13454 or by the insertion of the command
13461 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13466 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13467 while the math characters do not.
13469 \begin_inset space ~
13472 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13475 \begin_inset space ~
13483 \begin_inset space ~
13488 in the document font settings.
13491 \begin_layout Standard
13492 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13493 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13494 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13495 font (in most cases
13496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13511 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13512 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13520 \begin_inset space ~
13526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13532 \begin_layout Subsection
13533 Using Different Character Styles
13534 \begin_inset Index idx
13537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13544 \begin_inset Index idx
13547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13556 \begin_layout Standard
13557 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13558 automatically changes the character style for certain
13559 paragraph environments.
13561 supports two character styles,
13570 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13574 \begin_layout Standard
13579 style, do one of the following:
13582 \begin_layout Itemize
13583 click on the toolbar button
13592 \begin_layout Itemize
13593 use the key binding
13602 \begin_layout Standard
13603 These commands are all toggles.
13608 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13611 \begin_layout Standard
13612 One typically uses the
13616 style for proper names.
13618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13625 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13633 \begin_layout Standard
13634 A more widely used character style is the
13639 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13646 \begin_layout Itemize
13647 clicking on the toolbar button
13656 \begin_layout Itemize
13657 using the keybindings
13666 \begin_layout Standard
13671 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13673 use a different font.
13676 \begin_layout Standard
13677 We've been using the
13681 style all over the place in this document.
13682 Here's one more example:
13685 \begin_layout Quotation
13688 Do not overuse character styles!
13691 \begin_layout Standard
13692 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13693 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13694 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13695 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13699 \begin_layout Standard
13700 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13708 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13710 \begin_inset space ~
13713 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13719 arg "dialog-show character"
13725 \begin_layout Subsection
13726 Fine-Tuning with the
13731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13733 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13738 \begin_inset Index idx
13741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13750 \begin_layout Standard
13751 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13753 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13754 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13755 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13756 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13757 from ordinary dialog.
13760 \begin_layout Standard
13761 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13762 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13763 \begin_inset Newline newline
13766 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13767 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13770 \begin_layout Standard
13771 To use custom character styles, open the
13773 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13775 \begin_inset space ~
13778 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13781 dialog or press the toolbar button
13784 arg "dialog-show character"
13788 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13789 font property that you can choose.
13790 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13793 \begin_inset space ~
13798 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13803 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13804 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13805 environments all at once.
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13812 \begin_inset space ~
13824 \begin_layout Labeling
13825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13839 The possible options are:
13843 \begin_layout Labeling
13844 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13849 This is the Roman font family.
13850 Normally a serif font.
13851 It's also the default family.
13861 \begin_layout Labeling
13862 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13866 \begin_inset space ~
13873 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13885 \begin_layout Labeling
13886 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13893 This is the Typewriter font family.
13899 arg "font-typewriter"
13908 \begin_layout Labeling
13909 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13914 This corresponds to the print weight.
13919 \begin_layout Labeling
13920 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13925 This is the Medium font series.
13926 It's also the default series.
13929 \begin_layout Labeling
13930 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13937 This is the Bold font series.
13950 \begin_layout Labeling
13951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13956 As the name implies.
13961 \begin_layout Labeling
13962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13967 This is the Upright font shape.
13968 It's also the default shape.
13971 \begin_layout Labeling
13972 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13986 s the Italic font shape
13992 \begin_layout Labeling
13993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14000 This is the Slanted font shape
14002 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14003 , this is different from italic).
14006 \begin_layout Labeling
14007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14011 \begin_inset space ~
14018 This is the Small caps font shape
14025 \begin_layout Labeling
14026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14031 Alters the text color.
14032 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14036 \begin_inset space ~
14041 , which means that the document default color set in
14043 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14044 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14050 \begin_inset space ~
14055 is used, you can choose between
14088 \begin_inset Index idx
14091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14100 \begin_layout Labeling
14101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14106 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14107 the language of the document.
14108 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14109 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14111 \begin_inset Newline newline
14114 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14116 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14117 When using the spell checking (see section
14118 \begin_inset space ~
14122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14124 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14128 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14131 \begin_layout Labeling
14132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14137 Alters the size of the font.
14138 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14139 proportional to the document font size.
14140 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14141 the details, but a general description of what
14147 \begin_layout Labeling
14148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14169 arg "font-size tiny"
14175 \begin_layout Labeling
14176 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14197 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14203 \begin_layout Labeling
14204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14225 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14231 \begin_layout Labeling
14232 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14253 arg "font-size small"
14259 \begin_layout Labeling
14260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14274 It's also the default size.
14278 arg "font-size normal"
14284 \begin_layout Labeling
14285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14306 arg "font-size large"
14312 \begin_layout Labeling
14313 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14334 arg "font-size larger"
14340 \begin_layout Labeling
14341 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14362 arg "font-size largest"
14368 \begin_layout Labeling
14369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14390 arg "font-size huge"
14396 \begin_layout Labeling
14397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14418 arg "font-size giant"
14424 \begin_layout Labeling
14425 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14430 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 arg "font-size increase"
14456 \begin_layout Labeling
14457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14462 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 arg "font-size decrease"
14489 \begin_layout Standard
14494 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14495 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14497 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14498 — use those instead.
14499 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14502 \begin_layout Labeling
14503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14508 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14513 \begin_layout Labeling
14514 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14521 This is text with emphasize on
14524 This might seem like the same as
14528 , but it is actually a bit different.
14534 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14536 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14539 \begin_layout Labeling
14540 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14547 This is text with Underbar on.
14553 arg "font-underline"
14559 \begin_inset Newline newline
14564 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14565 when you could not change fonts.
14566 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14567 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14568 because some people
14572 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14575 \begin_layout Labeling
14576 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14580 \begin_inset space ~
14587 This is text with Double underbar on.
14593 arg "font-underunderline"
14597 \begin_inset Newline newline
14600 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14601 about double underbar.
14604 \begin_layout Labeling
14605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14609 \begin_inset space ~
14616 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14622 arg "font-underwave"
14626 \begin_inset Newline newline
14629 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14630 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14633 \begin_layout Labeling
14634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14641 This is text with Strikeout on.
14647 arg "font-strikeout"
14651 \begin_inset Newline newline
14654 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14655 changed in the meantime.
14658 \begin_layout Labeling
14659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14666 This is text with Noun on.
14673 , this is a logical attribute.
14674 Normally it's equivalent to
14677 \begin_inset space ~
14686 \begin_layout Standard
14687 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14688 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14690 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14692 \begin_inset space ~
14695 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14701 arg "dialog-show character"
14704 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14705 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14708 arg "textstyle-apply"
14712 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14716 \begin_layout Standard
14717 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14724 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14725 (suppose you just set the shape to
14726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14744 \begin_inset space ~
14756 \begin_layout Standard
14757 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14765 \begin_inset space ~
14777 \begin_layout Itemize
14783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14790 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14808 \begin_inset Newline newline
14812 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14826 \begin_inset Note Note
14829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14830 For more on phantoms see section
14831 \begin_inset space ~
14835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14837 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14847 \begin_inset Newline newline
14853 \begin_layout Itemize
14858 fonts use characters with serifs.
14859 These are the small
14860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14867 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14868 The following example shows the difference:
14869 \begin_inset Newline newline
14873 \begin_inset Newline newline
14878 text without serifs
14881 \begin_inset Newline newline
14884 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14885 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14892 \begin_layout Itemize
14897 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14898 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14899 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14902 \begin_layout Standard
14903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14911 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14914 \begin_inset space ~
14919 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14920 the property to be removed.
14921 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14922 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14923 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14941 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14942 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14950 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14959 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14970 If you, for example, set
14971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14989 \begin_inset space ~
14994 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15003 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15006 \begin_layout Standard
15007 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15008 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15011 \begin_layout Section
15012 Printing and Previewing
15015 \begin_layout Subsection
15019 \begin_layout Standard
15020 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15021 using \SpecialChar LyX
15022 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15023 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15024 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15025 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15027 Additional Features
15032 \begin_layout Standard
15034 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15037 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15038 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15039 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15042 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15043 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15044 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15045 to turn your writing into printable output.
15046 This happens in two stages:
15049 \begin_layout Enumerate
15050 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15051 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15053 a file with the extension,
15054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15068 \begin_layout Enumerate
15069 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15070 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15071 to use the commands in the
15075 file to produce printable output.
15078 \begin_layout Subsection
15079 Output file formats
15080 \begin_inset Index idx
15083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15092 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15099 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15100 Simple text (ASCII)
15101 \begin_inset Index idx
15104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15105 File formats ! ASCII
15113 \begin_layout Standard
15114 This file type has the extension
15115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15127 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15131 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15138 \begin_layout Standard
15139 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15141 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15142 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15144 \begin_inset space ~
15150 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15151 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15152 bibliography (section
15153 \begin_inset space ~
15157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15159 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15164 If your document includes such material, use
15166 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15167 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15169 \begin_inset space ~
15173 \begin_inset space ~
15177 \begin_inset space ~
15185 \begin_inset space ~
15189 \begin_inset space ~
15195 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15196 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15202 \begin_inset Index idx
15205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15206 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15215 \begin_layout Standard
15216 This file type has the extension
15217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15228 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15231 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15232 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15233 -Errors or to process it manually
15234 with console commands.
15235 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15236 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15237 's temporary directory whenever you
15238 view or export your document.
15241 \begin_layout Standard
15242 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15243 -file using the menu
15245 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15246 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15250 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15251 export variants are explained in section
15252 \begin_inset space ~
15256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15258 reference "subsec:Export"
15265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15267 \begin_inset Index idx
15270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15279 \begin_layout Standard
15280 This file type has the extension
15281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15301 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15302 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15303 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15307 \begin_layout Standard
15308 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15309 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15310 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15311 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15312 when you view the DVI.
15313 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15316 \begin_layout Standard
15317 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15319 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15320 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15325 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15326 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15328 \begin_inset space ~
15334 The latter option uses the program
15336 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15342 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15345 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15346 font access (see section
15347 \begin_inset space ~
15351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15353 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15358 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15359 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15366 \begin_inset Index idx
15369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15370 File formats ! PostScript
15378 \begin_layout Standard
15379 This file type has the extension
15380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15392 PostScript was developed by the company
15396 as a printer language.
15397 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15399 PostScript can be seen as a
15400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15403 programming language
15404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15407 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15412 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15419 \begin_inset Index idx
15422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15424 -packages ! pstricks
15434 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15437 \begin_layout Standard
15438 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15442 Encapsulated PostScript
15443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15446 (EPS, file extension
15447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15459 As \SpecialChar LyX
15460 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15461 convert them in the background to EPS.
15462 If, for example, you have 50
15463 \begin_inset space ~
15466 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15468 \begin_inset space ~
15471 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15472 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15474 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15475 EPS to avoid this problem.
15478 \begin_layout Standard
15479 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15481 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15482 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15490 \begin_inset Index idx
15493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15500 \begin_inset Index idx
15503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15512 \begin_layout Standard
15513 This file type has the extension
15514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15530 Portable Document Format
15531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15538 was derived from PostScript.
15539 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15548 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15549 looks exactly the same.
15552 \begin_layout Standard
15553 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15557 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15561 (JPG, file extension
15562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15589 Portable Network Graphics
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15593 (PNG, file extension
15594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15606 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15607 converts them in the
15608 background to one of these formats.
15609 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15610 will slow down your workflow.
15611 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15614 \begin_layout Standard
15615 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15617 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15623 \begin_layout Description
15625 \begin_inset space ~
15628 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15632 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15635 \begin_layout Description
15637 \begin_inset space ~
15644 ) This uses the program
15646 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15649 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15652 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15655 is a new engine, derived from
15659 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15660 access (see section
15661 \begin_inset space ~
15665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15667 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15672 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15673 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15678 \begin_layout Description
15680 \begin_inset space ~
15687 ) This uses the program
15692 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15698 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15699 font access (see section
15700 \begin_inset space ~
15704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15706 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15711 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15712 vertically written Japanese.
15715 \begin_layout Description
15717 \begin_inset space ~
15720 (cropped) This is the same as
15723 \begin_inset space ~
15728 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15729 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15730 to generate good-looking
15731 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15734 \begin_layout Description
15736 \begin_inset space ~
15739 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15743 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15747 \begin_layout Description
15749 \begin_inset space ~
15752 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15756 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15757 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15761 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15762 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15765 \begin_layout Standard
15769 \begin_inset space ~
15778 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15779 works without problems.
15780 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15781 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15785 \begin_inset space ~
15793 \begin_inset space ~
15798 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15808 \begin_inset Index idx
15811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15812 FileFormats ! XHTML
15818 \begin_inset Index idx
15821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15830 \begin_layout Standard
15831 This file type has the extension
15832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15844 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15845 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15846 When \SpecialChar LyX
15847 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15848 suitable for the purpose.
15849 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15852 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15855 between different formats, which are described in section
15857 Math Output in XHTML
15862 \begin_inset space ~
15870 \begin_layout Standard
15871 XHTML output remains
15872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15879 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15880 features are supported yet.
15884 and the World Wide Web
15888 Additional Features
15890 manual, for more information.
15893 \begin_layout Standard
15894 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15896 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15897 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15903 \begin_layout Subsection
15905 \begin_inset Index idx
15908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15917 \begin_layout Standard
15918 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15919 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15928 or use the toolbar button
15935 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15936 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15943 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15947 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15955 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15960 Further output formats can be selected via
15962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15963 View (Other Formats)
15965 or the toolbar button
15966 \begin_inset Graphics
15967 filename ../images/view-others.png
15969 groupId toolbarbuttons
15976 \begin_layout Standard
15977 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15978 viewer window using the menu
15980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15986 Update (Other Formats)
15991 \begin_layout Standard
15992 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15995 To have a real output, export your document.
15998 \begin_layout Section
15999 A few Words about Typography
16000 \begin_inset Index idx
16003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16012 \begin_layout Subsection
16013 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16014 \begin_inset Index idx
16017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16024 \begin_inset Index idx
16027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16036 \begin_layout Standard
16037 In \SpecialChar LyX
16039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16050 character comes in four lengths: the
16062 , and the minus sign:
16063 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 \begin_inset Tabular
16071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16072 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16073 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16074 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16075 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16076 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16105 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16145 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16172 \begin_inset space ~
16175 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16182 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16209 \begin_inset space ~
16212 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16233 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16267 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16273 \begin_layout Standard
16274 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16286 character multiple times in a row.
16287 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16288 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16321 \begin_layout Standard
16322 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16323 math mode and has a length of its own.
16324 Here are some examples:
16327 \begin_layout Enumerate
16328 line- and page-breaks
16329 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16339 \begin_layout Enumerate
16341 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16351 \begin_layout Enumerate
16352 Oh — there's a dash.
16353 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16363 \begin_layout Enumerate
16364 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16368 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16378 \begin_layout Subsection
16380 \begin_inset Index idx
16383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16392 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16399 \begin_layout Standard
16400 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16401 but automatically in the output.
16402 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16408 \begin_inset Index idx
16411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16418 following the rules of the document language.
16421 \begin_layout Standard
16423 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16427 font and with unusual constructs, like
16428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16436 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16437 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16438 This is done with the menu
16440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16441 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16443 \begin_inset space ~
16449 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16451 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16455 \begin_layout Standard
16456 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16457 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16468 would then see the hyphen
16469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16476 as a hyphenation possibility.
16477 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16478 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16479 as described in section
16480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16483 Prevent Hyphenation
16484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16490 \begin_inset space ~
16498 \begin_layout Subsection
16500 \begin_inset Index idx
16503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16512 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16513 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16516 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16523 \begin_layout Standard
16524 When \SpecialChar LyX
16525 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16526 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16528 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16534 appropriate amount of space.
16535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16538 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16540 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16541 gets after another word.
16544 \begin_layout Standard
16545 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16546 not work in all cases.
16548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16559 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16560 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 Here are some examples of
16568 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16571 \begin_layout Itemize
16576 \begin_layout Itemize
16581 \begin_layout Standard
16582 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16585 \begin_layout Itemize
16587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16591 this is too much space!
16594 \begin_layout Itemize
16599 \begin_layout Standard
16600 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16603 \begin_layout Standard
16604 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16607 \begin_layout Enumerate
16611 \begin_inset space ~
16616 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16617 \begin_inset space ~
16621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16623 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16628 \begin_inset Index idx
16631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16632 Spaces ! inter-word
16640 \begin_layout Enumerate
16644 \begin_inset space ~
16649 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16656 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16661 \begin_inset Index idx
16664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16673 \begin_layout Enumerate
16677 \begin_inset space ~
16681 \begin_inset space ~
16685 \begin_inset space ~
16692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16699 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16700 This function is also bound to
16703 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16709 \begin_layout Standard
16710 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16713 \begin_layout Itemize
16715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16719 \begin_inset space \space{}
16722 this is too much space!
16725 \begin_layout Itemize
16726 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16730 \begin_layout Standard
16731 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16732 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16734 will take care of this.
16737 \begin_layout Standard
16738 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16742 \begin_inset space ~
16748 feature described in the section
16750 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16755 Additional Features
16760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16762 \begin_inset Index idx
16765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16766 Typography ! Quotes
16772 \begin_inset Index idx
16775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16806 \begin_layout Standard
16808 usually sets quotes correctly.
16809 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16810 and use a closing quote at the end.
16812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16820 The keyboard character,
16824 , generates this automatically.
16827 \begin_layout Standard
16828 You can specify what character the
16832 key produces using the submenu
16838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16842 \begin_inset Index idx
16845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16846 Document ! Settings
16856 There are six choices:
16859 \begin_layout Labeling
16860 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16883 \begin_layout Labeling
16884 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16887 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16891 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16897 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16901 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16907 \begin_layout Labeling
16908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16911 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16915 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16921 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16925 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16931 \begin_layout Labeling
16932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16935 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16939 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16945 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16949 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16955 \begin_layout Labeling
16956 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16959 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16963 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16969 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16973 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16979 \begin_layout Labeling
16980 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16983 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16987 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16993 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16997 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17003 \begin_layout Standard
17004 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17007 arg "quote-insert single"
17013 \begin_layout Subsection
17015 \begin_inset Index idx
17018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17019 Typography ! Ligatures
17025 \begin_inset Index idx
17028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17059 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17066 \begin_layout Standard
17067 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17068 print them as single characters.
17069 These groups are known as
17074 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17075 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17077 Here are the standard ligatures:
17080 \begin_layout Itemize
17084 \begin_layout Itemize
17088 \begin_layout Itemize
17092 \begin_layout Itemize
17096 \begin_layout Itemize
17100 \begin_layout Standard
17101 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17104 \begin_layout Standard
17105 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17106 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17114 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17130 To break a ligature, use
17132 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17133 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17135 \begin_inset space ~
17142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17153 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17170 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17178 \begin_layout Subsection
17180 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17182 \begin_inset Index idx
17185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17195 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17202 \begin_layout Standard
17205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17209 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17212 \begin_layout Description
17214 The name of the game.
17217 \begin_layout Description
17219 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17223 \begin_layout Description
17225 The \SpecialChar TeX
17226 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17230 \begin_layout Description
17231 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17232 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17236 \begin_layout Standard
17237 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17243 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17251 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17252 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17253 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17254 converges to the number
17255 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17258 : The actual version is
17259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17267 , the previous one was
17268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17279 \begin_layout Subsection
17281 \begin_inset Index idx
17284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17293 \begin_layout Standard
17294 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17295 space between two words.
17296 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17306 for units use the menu
17308 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17309 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17311 \begin_inset space ~
17319 arg "space-insert thin"
17325 \begin_layout Standard
17326 Here is an example to show the differences:
17329 \begin_layout Standard
17330 \begin_inset Tabular
17331 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17332 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17333 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17334 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17341 \begin_inset space ~
17345 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17357 space between number and unit
17364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17373 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17385 half space between number and unit
17398 \begin_layout Subsection
17400 \begin_inset Index idx
17403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17404 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17412 \begin_layout Standard
17413 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17415 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17416 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17417 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17418 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17419 These bits of text became known as
17430 \begin_layout Standard
17431 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17432 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17433 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17434 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17435 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17436 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17437 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17438 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17439 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17440 \begin_inset Newline newline
17448 \begin_inset Newline newline
17456 \begin_inset Newline newline
17459 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17460 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17461 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17463 \begin_inset space ~
17467 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17469 key "latexcompanion"
17474 \begin_inset space ~
17478 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17484 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17485 's page break mechanism.
17488 \begin_layout Chapter
17489 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17492 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17499 \begin_layout Standard
17500 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17503 \begin_inset space ~
17509 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17512 \begin_layout Section
17514 \begin_inset Index idx
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17533 \begin_layout Standard
17535 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17538 \begin_layout Description
17541 \begin_inset space ~
17544 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17545 \begin_inset Newline newline
17549 \begin_inset Note Note
17552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17553 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17561 \begin_layout Description
17562 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17563 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17564 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17567 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17568 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17570 \begin_inset space ~
17576 \begin_inset Newline newline
17580 \begin_inset Note Comment
17583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17584 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17593 \begin_layout Description
17595 \begin_inset space ~
17598 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17599 set in the document settings under
17601 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17603 \begin_inset space ~
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17613 \begin_inset Newline newline
17617 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17626 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17627 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17632 of a comment that appears in the output.
17638 \begin_inset Newline newline
17642 \begin_inset Newline newline
17645 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17648 \begin_layout Standard
17649 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17661 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17664 \begin_layout Section
17666 \begin_inset Index idx
17669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17678 name "sec:Footnotes"
17685 \begin_layout Standard
17687 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17693 or the toolbar button
17696 arg "footnote-insert"
17708 \begin_inset Graphics
17709 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17718 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17719 's representation of your footnote.
17729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17748 label, the box will
17752 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17753 Clicking on the box label again will close
17766 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17767 and click on the footnote
17782 \begin_layout Standard
17783 Here is an example footnote:
17791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17792 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17802 position where the footnote box is placed.
17803 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17804 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17805 according to the document class.
17807 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17808 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17814 ey are described in the
17817 \begin_inset space ~
17825 \begin_layout Section
17827 \begin_inset Index idx
17830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17839 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17846 \begin_layout Standard
17847 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17849 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17853 \begin_inset space ~
17858 or the toolbar button
17861 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17887 appearing within your text.
17888 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17889 's representation of your margin
17898 \begin_layout Standard
17899 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17903 \begin_inset Marginal
17906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17908 This is a marginal note.
17916 \begin_layout Standard
17917 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17918 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17919 pages, right on odd pages.
17922 \begin_layout Standard
17923 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17926 \begin_inset space ~
17934 \begin_inset space ~
17942 \begin_layout Section
17943 Graphics and Images
17944 \begin_inset Index idx
17947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17954 \begin_inset Index idx
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17966 name "sec:Graphics"
17973 \begin_layout Standard
17974 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17975 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17978 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17983 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17987 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17990 \begin_layout Standard
17991 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17996 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17997 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17999 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18000 \begin_inset space ~
18004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18006 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18013 \begin_layout Standard
18018 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18019 of the image in the output.
18020 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18024 \begin_inset space ~
18028 \begin_inset space ~
18037 \begin_inset space ~
18041 \begin_inset space ~
18045 \begin_inset space ~
18050 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18051 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18059 \begin_layout Standard
18063 \begin_inset space ~
18067 \begin_inset space ~
18072 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18073 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18075 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18080 \begin_inset space ~
18085 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18086 with the image size is printed.
18089 \begin_layout Standard
18090 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18091 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18093 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18096 \begin_layout Standard
18098 \begin_inset Graphics
18099 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18107 \begin_layout Standard
18108 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18109 the image into a float, see section
18110 \begin_inset space ~
18114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18116 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18123 \begin_layout Subsection
18125 \begin_inset Index idx
18128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18137 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18144 \begin_layout Standard
18145 You can insert images in any known file format.
18146 But as we explained in section
18147 \begin_inset space ~
18151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18153 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18157 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18159 therefore uses the program
18163 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18164 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18165 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18166 \begin_inset space ~
18170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18172 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18179 \begin_layout Standard
18180 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18183 \begin_layout Description
18185 \begin_inset space ~
18188 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18189 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18190 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18194 Graphics Interchange Format
18195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18198 (GIF, file extension
18199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18211 \begin_inset Index idx
18214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18246 Portable Network Graphics
18247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18250 (PNG, file extension
18251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18263 \begin_inset Index idx
18266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18298 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18302 (JPG, file extension
18303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18327 \begin_inset Index idx
18330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18361 \begin_layout Description
18363 \begin_inset space ~
18366 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18368 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18369 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18370 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18371 \begin_inset Newline newline
18374 Scalable image formats can be
18375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18378 Scalable Vector Graphics
18379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18382 (SVG, file extension
18383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18395 \begin_inset Index idx
18398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18430 Encapsulated PostScript
18431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18434 (EPS, file extension
18435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18447 \begin_inset Index idx
18450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18482 Portable Document Format
18483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18486 (PDF, file extension
18487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18499 \begin_inset Index idx
18502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18517 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18518 result will not be scalable.
18519 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18525 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18533 \begin_layout Standard
18534 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18541 \begin_layout Subsection
18542 Grouping of Image Settings
18543 \begin_inset Index idx
18546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18547 Images ! Settings grouping
18555 \begin_layout Standard
18556 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18558 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18559 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18561 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18562 need to manually change each of them.
18566 \begin_layout Standard
18567 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18570 \begin_inset space ~
18574 \begin_inset space ~
18586 \begin_inset space ~
18590 \begin_inset space ~
18596 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18597 and checking the name of the desired group.
18600 \begin_layout Section
18602 \begin_inset Index idx
18605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18621 \begin_layout Standard
18622 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18625 arg "tabular-insert"
18630 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18634 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18635 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18636 from the rest of the table.
18637 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18638 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18640 Here is an example table:
18643 \begin_layout Standard
18645 \begin_inset Tabular
18646 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18647 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18648 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18649 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18650 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18651 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18851 \begin_layout Subsection
18855 \begin_layout Standard
18856 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18859 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18863 This brings up the table dialog.
18864 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18865 cursor is placed currently.
18866 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18867 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18868 done on all of your selection.
18871 \begin_layout Standard
18872 In addition to the table dialog, the
18875 \begin_inset space ~
18880 helps you in setting table properties.
18881 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18884 \begin_layout Standard
18888 \begin_inset space ~
18893 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18894 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18895 current cell respectively.
18896 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18898 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18899 of text, see section
18900 \begin_inset space ~
18904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18906 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18913 \begin_layout Standard
18914 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18915 using the check box
18924 This will merge the cells to
18928 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18929 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18930 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18931 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18932 in the last row without the upper border:
18935 \begin_layout Standard
18937 \begin_inset Tabular
18938 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18939 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18941 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18942 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18954 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18963 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19039 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 \begin_layout Standard
19075 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19076 -arguments for the table.
19077 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19078 explained in the chapter
19085 \begin_inset space ~
19091 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19092 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19093 but are visible in the output.
19096 \begin_layout Standard
19097 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 Most DVI-viewers are
19109 able to display rotations.
19117 \begin_layout Standard
19122 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19127 adds lines for all cell borders.
19130 \begin_layout Subsection
19132 \begin_inset Index idx
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 Tables ! Longtables
19142 \begin_inset Index idx
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 \begin_layout Standard
19155 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19158 \begin_inset space ~
19162 \begin_inset space ~
19171 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19172 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19175 \begin_layout Description
19180 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19181 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19182 except for the first page, if
19185 \begin_inset space ~
19193 \begin_layout Description
19197 \begin_inset space ~
19202 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19203 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19206 \begin_layout Description
19211 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19212 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19213 except for the last page, if
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19224 \begin_layout Description
19228 \begin_inset space ~
19233 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19234 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19237 \begin_layout Description
19238 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19239 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19245 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19248 \begin_inset space ~
19256 \begin_layout Standard
19257 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19258 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19259 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19265 In this context, first means first in this order:
19268 \begin_inset space ~
19280 \begin_inset space ~
19285 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19288 \begin_layout Standard
19290 \begin_inset Tabular
19291 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19292 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19293 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19294 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19295 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19296 <row endfirsthead="true">
19297 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19303 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19308 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19317 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19327 <row endfirsthead="true">
19328 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19339 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19348 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19360 <row endhead="true">
19361 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19391 <row endhead="true">
19392 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19403 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19424 <row endfoot="true">
19425 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19436 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19445 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19476 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20417 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20426 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21376 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <row endlastfoot="true">
21407 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21418 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21444 \begin_layout Subsection
21446 \begin_inset Index idx
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21458 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21465 \begin_layout Standard
21466 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21467 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21468 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21469 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21473 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21476 \begin_layout Standard
21477 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21478 for the column in the table dialog.
21479 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21480 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21484 \begin_layout Standard
21486 \begin_inset Tabular
21487 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21488 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21489 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21490 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21491 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21511 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 This is longer now.
21641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21692 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21693 This is longer now.
21698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 \begin_layout Standard
21725 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21726 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21731 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21732 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21738 Selection with the mouse or with
21742 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21743 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21744 the selection from outside the table.
21747 \begin_layout Section
21749 \begin_inset Index idx
21752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21768 \begin_layout Subsection
21772 \begin_layout Standard
21773 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21774 have a fixed location.
21776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21783 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21791 \begin_inset space ~
21796 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21797 too many notes on the current page.
21800 \begin_layout Standard
21801 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21802 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21803 and pages without text.
21804 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21805 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21806 Floats are therefore numbered.
21807 Referencing is described in section
21808 \begin_inset space ~
21812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21814 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21821 \begin_layout Standard
21822 To insert a float, use the menu
21824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21828 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21829 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21831 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21832 \begin_inset Index idx
21835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21841 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21842 paragraph within the float.
21843 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21844 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21845 left-clicking on the box label.
21846 A closed float box looks like this:
21847 \begin_inset Graphics
21848 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21853 – a gray button with a red label.
21856 \begin_layout Standard
21857 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21859 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21862 \begin_layout Subsection
21864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21866 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21871 \begin_inset Index idx
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21875 Floats ! Figure floats
21883 \begin_layout Standard
21885 \begin_inset space ~
21889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21891 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21895 was created using the menu
21897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21898 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21904 arg "float-insert figure"
21908 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21917 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21921 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21922 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21924 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21926 \begin_inset space ~
21934 arg "layout-paragraph"
21940 \begin_layout Standard
21941 \begin_inset Float figure
21946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21948 \begin_inset Graphics
21949 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21959 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21964 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21968 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21981 \begin_layout Standard
21982 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21983 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21985 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21994 ) and refer to it using the menu
21996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22002 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22006 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22007 vague references like
22008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22015 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22016 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22026 For more about cross-references, see section
22027 \begin_inset space ~
22031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22033 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22040 \begin_layout Standard
22041 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22042 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22043 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22044 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22045 as described in section
22046 \begin_inset space ~
22050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22052 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22058 \begin_inset space ~
22062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22064 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22068 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22069 You can also set the images one below the other.
22071 \begin_inset space ~
22075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22077 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22084 reference "fig:Platypus"
22088 are the subfigures.
22091 \begin_layout Standard
22092 \begin_inset Float figure
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22098 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22102 \begin_inset Float figure
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22113 name "fig:Undefinable"
22125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22126 \begin_inset Graphics
22127 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22138 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22142 \begin_inset Float figure
22147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22153 name "fig:Platypus"
22165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 \begin_inset Graphics
22167 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22179 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22191 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22195 Two distorted images.
22208 \begin_layout Subsection
22210 \begin_inset Index idx
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 Floats ! Table floats
22222 \begin_layout Standard
22223 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22225 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22226 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22229 or the toolbar button
22232 arg "float-insert table"
22236 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22237 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22238 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22240 \begin_inset space ~
22244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22246 reference "tab:Table-float"
22253 \begin_layout Standard
22254 \begin_inset Float table
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22265 name "tab:Table-float"
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22279 \begin_inset Tabular
22280 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22281 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22282 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22283 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22284 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22435 \end{array}\right]$
22443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22456 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22477 \begin_layout Subsection
22479 \begin_inset Index idx
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22491 \begin_layout Standard
22493 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22494 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22495 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22497 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22505 \begin_inset space ~
22513 \begin_layout Section
22515 \begin_inset Index idx
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22527 \begin_layout Standard
22529 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22531 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22532 \begin_inset space \space{}
22539 \begin_layout Standard
22540 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22541 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22547 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22548 and its alignment within the page.
22551 \begin_layout Standard
22553 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22563 height_special "totalheight"
22568 backgroundcolor "none"
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22574 This is a minipage.
22575 The text is set in an italic style.
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22582 another formatting.
22590 \begin_layout Standard
22591 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22594 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22598 as described in section
22599 \begin_inset space ~
22603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22605 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22610 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22616 \begin_layout Standard
22617 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22627 height_special "totalheight"
22632 backgroundcolor "none"
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22636 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22637 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22643 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22647 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22657 height_special "totalheight"
22662 backgroundcolor "none"
22665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22666 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22667 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22675 \begin_layout Standard
22676 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22682 \begin_layout Standard
22683 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22685 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22692 \begin_inset space ~
22700 \begin_layout Chapter
22701 Mathematical Formulas
22702 \begin_inset Index idx
22705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 \begin_inset Index idx
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22746 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22753 \begin_layout Standard
22754 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22759 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22762 \begin_layout Section
22764 \begin_inset Index idx
22767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 \begin_layout Standard
22777 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22790 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22792 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22793 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22794 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22802 \begin_layout Standard
22803 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22807 \begin_inset space ~
22812 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22815 \begin_layout Standard
22816 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22817 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22820 \begin_layout Standard
22821 This is a line with an inline formula
22822 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22828 \begin_layout Standard
22829 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22830 paragraph, like this one:
22831 \begin_inset Formula
22838 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22841 \begin_layout Standard
22843 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22845 For example, typing
22846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22859 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22860 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22864 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22867 \begin_inset space ~
22875 \begin_layout Subsection
22876 Navigating in Formulas
22877 \begin_inset Index idx
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22889 \begin_layout Standard
22890 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22891 achieved with the arrow keys.
22893 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22894 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22899 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22900 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22904 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22908 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22911 \end{array}\right]$
22919 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22924 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22925 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22928 \begin_layout Standard
22933 , printed in this document as
22934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22938 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22945 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22946 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22947 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22952 For example, if you want
22953 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22961 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22971 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22975 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22980 , since in the latter case only the
22983 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22988 will be under the square root sign:
22989 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22995 \begin_layout Standard
22996 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22998 \begin_inset Formula
23000 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23009 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23010 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23013 \begin_layout Subsection
23017 \begin_layout Standard
23018 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23019 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23023 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23024 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23025 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23026 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23027 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23031 \begin_layout Subsection
23032 Exponents and Subscripts
23033 \begin_inset Index idx
23036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23043 \begin_inset Index idx
23046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 \begin_layout Standard
23056 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23059 arg "math-superscript"
23065 arg "math-subscript"
23068 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23070 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23073 , type in a formula
23076 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23086 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23092 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23096 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23102 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23108 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23117 , you have to use an extra
23121 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23122 For example, if you want
23123 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23129 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23135 Subscripts are similar: To get
23136 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23142 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23150 \begin_layout Subsection
23152 \begin_inset Index idx
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 \begin_layout Standard
23165 Create a fraction either with the command
23171 or by using the icon
23174 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23180 \begin_inset space ~
23186 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23187 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23188 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23193 To move back up, press
23198 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23199 \begin_inset Formula
23201 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23204 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23212 \begin_layout Subsection
23214 \begin_inset Index idx
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 \begin_layout Standard
23227 Roots can be created using the
23230 \begin_inset space ~
23238 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23244 arg "math-insert \\root"
23266 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23272 always produces a square root.
23275 \begin_layout Subsection
23276 Operators with Limits
23277 \begin_inset Index idx
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23287 \begin_inset Index idx
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23299 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23306 \begin_layout Standard
23308 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23312 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23315 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23316 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23317 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23318 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23319 The sum operator will automatically place its
23320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23327 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23329 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23333 \begin_inset Formula
23335 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23340 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23344 \begin_layout Standard
23345 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23347 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23348 behind the operator and using the menu
23350 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23351 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23353 \begin_inset space ~
23357 \begin_inset space ~
23371 \begin_layout Standard
23372 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23381 \begin_inset Index idx
23384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23391 \begin_inset Formula
23393 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23398 which will place the
23399 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23411 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23412 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23418 \begin_layout Standard
23419 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23426 Have a look at section
23427 \begin_inset space ~
23431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23433 reference "subsec:Functions"
23437 for an explanation of function macros.
23440 \begin_layout Subsection
23442 \begin_inset Index idx
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_layout Standard
23455 Most math symbols can be found in the
23458 \begin_inset space ~
23463 under one of several categories; including
23480 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23484 \begin_layout Standard
23485 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23486 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23487 don't have to use the
23490 \begin_inset space ~
23495 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23497 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23500 \begin_layout Subsection
23502 \begin_inset Index idx
23505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 \begin_layout Standard
23515 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23521 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23527 \begin_inset space ~
23535 arg "math-insert \\space"
23539 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23540 For example, the sequence
23545 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23548 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23550 \begin_inset Graphics
23551 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23556 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23557 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23558 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23559 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23560 , because they are negative
23562 Here are two examples:
23565 \begin_layout Standard
23575 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23581 \begin_layout Standard
23591 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23597 \begin_layout Subsection
23599 \begin_inset Index idx
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23611 name "subsec:Functions"
23618 \begin_layout Standard
23622 \begin_inset space ~
23627 contains under the button
23630 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23633 a number of function macros, such as
23634 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23638 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23646 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23653 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23654 avoid confusions, because
23655 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23659 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23665 \begin_layout Standard
23666 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23668 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23672 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23678 \begin_layout Standard
23679 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23680 are placed, as described in section
23681 \begin_inset space ~
23685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23687 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23694 \begin_layout Subsection
23696 \begin_inset Index idx
23699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 \begin_layout Standard
23709 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23711 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23712 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23713 commands, for example, to enter
23714 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23717 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23718 Our example is entered by typing
23723 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23730 \begin_inset space ~
23734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23736 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23740 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23743 \begin_layout Standard
23744 \begin_inset Float table
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23750 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23755 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23759 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23769 \begin_inset Tabular
23770 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23771 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23772 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23773 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23774 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23858 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23966 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24074 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24128 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24182 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24356 \begin_layout Standard
24357 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24360 \begin_inset space ~
24368 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24371 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24375 \begin_layout Section
24376 Brackets and Delimiters
24377 \begin_inset Index idx
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24387 \begin_inset Index idx
24390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24399 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24406 \begin_layout Standard
24407 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24409 For some purposes, using just the keys
24414 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24415 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24416 toolbar delimiter icon
24419 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24423 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24424 \begin_inset Formula
24426 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24434 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24435 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24439 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24442 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24448 \begin_inset Formula
24450 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24458 \begin_layout Standard
24459 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24460 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24464 \begin_layout Standard
24465 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24466 left side and right side.
24467 If you use the option
24470 \begin_inset space ~
24475 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24476 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24478 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24483 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24484 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24487 \begin_layout Standard
24488 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24489 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24490 is to go inside the brackets.
24491 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24496 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24497 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24498 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24502 arg "math-delim ( )"
24508 \begin_layout Section
24509 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24510 \begin_inset Index idx
24513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24520 \begin_inset Index idx
24523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 \begin_inset Index idx
24533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24534 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24542 \begin_layout Standard
24543 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24547 \begin_inset space ~
24555 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24559 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24560 Here is an example:
24561 \begin_inset Formula
24563 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24572 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24573 \begin_inset space ~
24577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24579 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24584 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24585 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24586 This alignment is set in the box
24591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24640 for every column as default.
24641 For example, the sequence
24642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24653 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24654 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24655 corresponds to the relevant column.
24656 The result will look like this:
24657 \begin_inset Formula
24660 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24661 column & has & has\,right\\
24662 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24671 \begin_layout Standard
24672 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24675 arg "newline-insert newline"
24678 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24679 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24681 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24684 or the math toolbar.
24687 \begin_layout Standard
24688 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24689 It can be created with the menu
24691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24692 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24694 \begin_inset space ~
24706 Here is an example:
24707 \begin_inset Formula
24721 \begin_layout Standard
24722 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24725 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24728 arg "newline-insert newline"
24732 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24737 arg "newline-insert newline"
24740 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24748 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24749 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24750 A new row is created by every further entry of
24753 arg "newline-insert newline"
24757 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24758 Here is an example:
24759 \begin_inset Formula
24761 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24762 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24767 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24768 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24769 \begin_inset Formula
24771 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24779 \begin_layout Standard
24780 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24787 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24788 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24791 reference "eq:asquared"
24796 The other types are described in section
24797 \begin_inset space ~
24801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24803 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24810 \begin_layout Section
24811 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24812 \begin_inset Index idx
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24816 Math ! Formula numbering
24822 \begin_inset Index idx
24825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24826 Math ! Referencing formulas
24832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24834 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24841 \begin_layout Standard
24842 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24844 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24845 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24847 \begin_inset space ~
24851 \begin_inset space ~
24859 arg "math-number-toggle"
24863 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24864 within parentheses.
24865 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24866 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24867 the document class.
24868 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24869 separated by a dot:
24870 \begin_inset Formula
24880 arg "math-number-toggle"
24883 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24884 You can only number displayed formulas.
24887 \begin_layout Standard
24888 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24890 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24891 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24893 \begin_inset space ~
24897 \begin_inset space ~
24905 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24908 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24909 \begin_inset Formula
24912 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24918 To number all lines use the shortcut
24921 arg "math-number-toggle"
24927 \begin_layout Standard
24928 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24931 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24932 A label is inserted with the menu
24934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24943 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24944 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24945 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24957 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24958 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24959 We inserted in the following example the label
24960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24967 in the second line:
24968 \begin_inset Formula
24970 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24971 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24976 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24977 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24978 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24980 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24982 \begin_inset space ~
24990 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24994 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24995 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24996 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24997 as the formula number:
25000 \begin_layout Standard
25001 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25004 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25011 \begin_layout Standard
25012 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25013 's cross-reference box are described in section
25014 \begin_inset space ~
25018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25020 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25025 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25033 \begin_layout Section
25034 User defined math macros
25035 \begin_inset Index idx
25038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25047 \begin_layout Standard
25049 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25050 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25051 Math macros are explained in section
25054 \begin_inset space ~
25066 \begin_layout Section
25070 \begin_layout Subsection
25072 \begin_inset Index idx
25075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25084 \begin_layout Standard
25085 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25086 To set a font in a formula, use the
25089 \begin_inset space ~
25097 arg "math-insert \\font"
25100 , or enter its command, listed in table
25101 \begin_inset space ~
25105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25107 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25114 \begin_layout Standard
25115 \begin_inset Float table
25120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25121 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25126 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25130 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25140 \begin_inset Tabular
25141 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25142 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25176 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25263 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25290 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25378 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25412 \begin_layout Standard
25413 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25437 \begin_layout Standard
25438 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25439 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25444 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25445 space when you need a space in the box.
25446 Here is an example where
25447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25458 denotes the set of numbers:
25459 \begin_inset Formula
25461 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25469 \begin_layout Standard
25470 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25471 You can, for example, put a character in
25480 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25484 \begin_inset Newline newline
25487 So it is better not to use this feature.
25490 \begin_layout Standard
25491 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25492 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25496 \begin_inset Newline newline
25499 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25505 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25506 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25512 \begin_layout Standard
25519 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25522 \begin_layout Standard
25523 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25526 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25528 \begin_inset space ~
25536 \begin_layout Subsection
25538 \begin_inset Index idx
25541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25550 \begin_layout Standard
25551 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25553 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25557 \begin_inset space ~
25561 \begin_inset space ~
25569 \begin_inset space ~
25577 arg "math-insert \\font"
25581 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25582 in black instead of blue.
25583 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25584 Here is an example:
25585 \begin_inset Formula
25588 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25589 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25598 \begin_layout Subsection
25600 \begin_inset Index idx
25603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25612 \begin_layout Standard
25613 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25614 automatically chosen in most situations.
25632 For most characters,
25640 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25641 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25646 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25647 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25648 thinks are appropriate.
25649 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25652 arg "math-insert \\style"
25656 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25657 For example, you can set
25658 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25661 , which is normally in
25670 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25674 The four styles are used in the following example:
25677 \begin_layout Standard
25678 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25682 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25686 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25690 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25696 \begin_layout Standard
25697 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25698 is set in a particular size with the menu
25700 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25702 \begin_inset space ~
25707 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25708 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25709 will be adjusted to correspond.
25710 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25721 \begin_layout Standard
25725 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25731 \begin_layout Section
25732 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25734 \begin_inset Index idx
25737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25744 \begin_inset Index idx
25747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25756 \begin_layout Standard
25758 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25759 that are in common use.
25762 \begin_layout Subsection
25763 Enabling AMS-Support
25766 \begin_layout Standard
25767 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25768 the document by selecting the checkbox
25771 \begin_inset space ~
25775 \begin_inset space ~
25779 \begin_inset space ~
25786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25790 \begin_inset Index idx
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25794 Document ! Settings
25802 \begin_inset space ~
25808 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25809 -errors in formulas,
25810 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25813 \begin_layout Subsection
25815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25817 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25822 \begin_inset Index idx
25825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25826 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25834 \begin_layout Standard
25835 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25836 provides a selection of different formula types.
25838 allows you to choose between
25859 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25860 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25866 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25869 \begin_layout Chapter
25873 \begin_layout Section
25875 \begin_inset Index idx
25878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25887 name "sec:Cross-References"
25894 \begin_layout Standard
25895 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25896 's strengths is cross-references.
25897 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25899 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25900 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25901 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25904 \begin_layout Enumerate
25908 \begin_layout Enumerate
25909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25911 name "enu:Second-item"
25918 \begin_layout Enumerate
25922 \begin_layout Standard
25923 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25928 or by pressing the toolbar button
25935 A gray label box like this:
25936 \begin_inset Graphics
25937 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25942 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25944 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25979 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25980 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25996 \begin_layout Standard
25997 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26002 or the toolbar button
26005 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26009 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26010 \begin_inset Graphics
26011 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26016 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26018 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26031 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 As an alternative to
26038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26041 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26046 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26047 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26049 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26061 \begin_layout Standard
26062 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26063 \begin_inset space ~
26067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26069 reference "enu:Second-item"
26076 \begin_layout Standard
26077 It is recommended to use a protected space
26081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26082 described in section
26083 \begin_inset space ~
26087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26089 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26098 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26099 line breaks between them.
26102 \begin_layout Standard
26103 There are six formats of cross-references:
26106 \begin_layout Description
26107 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26110 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26117 \begin_layout Description
26118 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26119 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26131 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26138 \begin_layout Description
26139 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26140 \begin_inset space ~
26144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26145 LatexCommand pageref
26146 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26153 \begin_layout Description
26155 \begin_inset space ~
26159 \begin_inset space ~
26162 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26164 LatexCommand vpageref
26165 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26170 \begin_inset Newline newline
26173 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26174 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26175 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26176 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26177 it prints “on the next page”.
26178 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26181 \begin_layout Description
26183 \begin_inset space ~
26187 \begin_inset space ~
26191 \begin_inset space ~
26194 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26197 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26202 \begin_inset Newline newline
26205 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26211 ; otherwise it behaves like
26215 \begin_inset space ~
26219 \begin_inset space ~
26228 \begin_layout Description
26230 \begin_inset space ~
26233 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26234 \begin_inset Newline newline
26238 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26246 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26256 \begin_inset Index idx
26259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26261 -packages ! prettyref
26267 \begin_inset Index idx
26270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26272 -packages ! refstyle
26283 \begin_inset Newline newline
26286 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26287 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26290 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26294 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26295 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26303 is the default and preferred because
26307 supports only English documents.
26308 The format is specified by using the command
26320 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26321 preamble of the document.
26322 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26335 ) can be done with this command
26336 \begin_inset Newline newline
26343 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26348 \begin_inset Newline newline
26351 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26353 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26355 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26362 \begin_layout Description
26364 \begin_inset space ~
26367 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26369 LatexCommand nameref
26370 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26377 \begin_layout Standard
26378 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26379 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26381 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26385 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26389 \begin_layout Standard
26390 You can only use the style
26394 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26398 is always possible.
26401 \begin_layout Standard
26402 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26403 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26405 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26406 \begin_inset space ~
26410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26412 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26419 \begin_layout Standard
26420 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26424 \begin_inset space ~
26428 \begin_inset space ~
26433 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26434 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26437 \begin_inset space ~
26442 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26443 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26446 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26452 \begin_layout Standard
26453 You can change labels at any time.
26454 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26455 do not need to think about this.
26458 \begin_layout Standard
26459 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26461 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26465 \begin_layout Standard
26466 References are described in detail in the section
26467 \begin_inset space ~
26471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26481 \begin_inset space ~
26489 \begin_layout Section
26490 Table of Contents and other Listings
26491 \begin_inset Index idx
26494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26501 \begin_inset Index idx
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26520 \begin_layout Subsection
26522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26524 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26531 \begin_layout Standard
26532 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26535 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26537 \begin_inset space ~
26541 \begin_inset space ~
26547 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26549 If you click on it, the
26553 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26554 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26555 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26557 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26559 \begin_inset space ~
26564 that is described in section
26565 \begin_inset space ~
26569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26571 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26578 \begin_layout Standard
26579 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26580 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26582 \begin_inset space ~
26586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26588 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26592 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26594 \begin_inset space ~
26598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26600 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26604 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26606 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26609 \begin_layout Subsection
26610 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26613 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26623 You can insert them via the
26625 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26629 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26632 \begin_layout Section
26633 URLs and Hyperlinks
26634 \begin_inset Index idx
26637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26644 \begin_inset Index idx
26647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 \begin_layout Subsection
26658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26667 \begin_layout Standard
26668 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26676 \begin_layout Standard
26677 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26679 \begin_inset Flex URL
26682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26692 \begin_layout Standard
26693 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26699 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26703 \begin_layout Standard
26704 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26712 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26721 \begin_layout Subsection
26723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26725 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26732 \begin_layout Standard
26733 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26735 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26738 or with the toolbar button
26745 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26754 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26755 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26756 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26758 name "LyX's homepage"
26759 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26763 , an Email address like this:
26764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26766 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26767 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26772 , or a link to a file.
26775 \begin_layout Standard
26776 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26789 to the link target.
26792 \begin_layout Standard
26793 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26794 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26795 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26796 the text style dialog.
26797 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26801 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26803 name "LyX's homepage"
26804 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26811 \begin_layout Standard
26812 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26816 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26819 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26823 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26825 \begin_inset Newline newline
26833 \begin_inset Newline newline
26840 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26843 \begin_layout Section
26845 \begin_inset Index idx
26848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26857 name "sec:Appendices"
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26865 Appendices are created with the menu
26867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26869 \begin_inset space ~
26873 \begin_inset space ~
26879 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26880 as the appendix part of the book.
26881 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26884 \begin_layout Standard
26885 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26886 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26887 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26888 and the subsection number.
26889 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26893 \begin_layout Standard
26895 \begin_inset space ~
26899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26901 reference "chap:Credits"
26906 \begin_inset space ~
26910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26912 reference "subsec:Export"
26919 \begin_layout Section
26921 \begin_inset Index idx
26924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26933 name "sec:Bibliography"
26940 \begin_layout Standard
26941 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26943 You can include a bibliography database,
26947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26948 Known under the name
26949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26952 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26962 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26963 manually, using the paragraph environment
26967 , which was described in section
26968 \begin_inset space ~
26972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26974 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26979 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26980 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26984 use a bibliography database.
26987 \begin_layout Subsection
26988 The Bibliography Environment
26991 \begin_layout Standard
26996 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26998 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27007 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27009 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27019 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27022 \begin_layout Standard
27023 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27028 or the toolbar button
27031 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27035 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27036 containing the available citations.
27037 Select one or more keys from the list and
27047 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27048 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27052 \begin_layout Standard
27053 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27054 entry with surrounding brackets.
27059 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27060 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27072 \begin_layout Standard
27076 Companion Second Edition
27079 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27081 key "latexcompanion"
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27089 The \SpecialChar LyX
27090 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27091 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27100 \begin_layout Standard
27101 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27104 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27106 \begin_inset space ~
27114 arg "layout-paragraph"
27118 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27121 \begin_layout Subsection
27122 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27124 \begin_inset Index idx
27127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27128 Bibliography ! Databases
27134 \begin_inset Index idx
27137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27138 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27147 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27154 \begin_layout Standard
27155 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27161 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27163 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27164 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27169 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27171 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27172 your working field in a database.
27173 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27174 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27175 list for that document.
27176 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27180 \begin_layout Standard
27181 The database is a text file with the file extension
27182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27193 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27194 The format is explained in
27195 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27201 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27203 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27205 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27210 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27211 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27212 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27214 \begin_inset Flex URL
27217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27219 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27228 To use a database, use the menu
27230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27235 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27237 \begin_inset space ~
27243 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27244 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27251 Add bibliography to TOC
27253 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27258 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27259 in the document or just the cited references.
27262 \begin_layout Standard
27263 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27275 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27276 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27277 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27278 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27280 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27286 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27287 \begin_inset Newline newline
27291 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27293 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27305 \begin_layout Standard
27306 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27309 \begin_layout Standard
27310 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27311 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27313 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27321 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27326 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27327 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27328 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27332 The following variants are possible:
27335 \begin_layout Description
27336 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27337 with other bibliography packages (e.
27338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27342 \begin_inset space \space{}
27349 ), only with the package
27353 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27357 \begin_layout Description
27358 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27359 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27360 with all bibliography packages, except
27365 \begin_layout Description
27366 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27371 , works with all bibliography packages
27374 \begin_layout Standard
27375 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27376 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27378 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27381 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27385 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27394 \begin_layout Standard
27395 When you select the option
27397 Sectioned bibliography
27401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27402 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27405 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27406 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27408 Customizing Bibliographies
27412 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27417 Additional Features
27422 \begin_layout Standard
27423 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27424 the two methods of creating them.
27425 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27426 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27427 We used the style file
27431 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27434 \begin_layout Subsection
27436 \begin_inset Index idx
27439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27440 Bibliography ! Citation format
27448 \begin_layout Standard
27449 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27450 For this feature you need to enable the option
27456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27460 \begin_inset Index idx
27463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27464 Document ! Settings
27474 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27475 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27476 style files as explained in
27477 the previous section.
27480 \begin_layout Standard
27481 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27482 the citation reference window.
27483 Here is an example where the text
27484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27488 \begin_inset space ~
27492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27495 appears after the reference:
27498 \begin_layout Standard
27500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27503 key "latexcompanion"
27510 \begin_layout Section
27512 \begin_inset Index idx
27515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27531 \begin_layout Standard
27532 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27536 \begin_inset space ~
27541 or the toolbar button
27548 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27549 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27550 by \SpecialChar LyX
27551 as the index entry.
27554 \begin_layout Standard
27555 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27558 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27560 \begin_inset space ~
27566 A light blue box labeled
27567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27578 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27579 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27583 \begin_layout Standard
27584 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27585 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27586 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27587 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27589 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27591 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27598 \begin_layout Subsection
27599 Grouping Index Entries
27600 \begin_inset Index idx
27603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27612 \begin_layout Standard
27613 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27615 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27616 lists under the entry
27617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27625 First we create the entry
27626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27634 \begin_inset space ~
27638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27640 reference "subsec:Lists"
27645 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27646 \begin_inset space ~
27650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27652 reference "sec:Itemize"
27656 , we insert the command
27659 \begin_layout Standard
27665 \begin_layout Standard
27669 \begin_layout Standard
27675 \begin_layout Standard
27676 for the enumerated list in section
27677 \begin_inset space ~
27681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27683 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27690 \begin_layout Standard
27691 The exclamation mark
27692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27699 marks the grouping levels.
27700 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27701 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27702 If we don't have an index entry for
27703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27710 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27713 \begin_layout Subsection
27715 \begin_inset Index idx
27718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27719 Index ! Page ranges
27727 \begin_layout Standard
27728 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27730 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27731 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27732 an index entry in section
27733 \begin_inset space ~
27737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27739 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27746 \begin_layout Standard
27749 Paragraph environments|(
27752 \begin_layout Standard
27753 and another entry at the end of section
27754 \begin_inset space ~
27758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27760 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27767 \begin_layout Standard
27770 Paragraph environments|)
27773 \begin_layout Standard
27775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27798 respectively start and end the index range.
27799 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27800 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27801 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27802 An example is the index entry
27803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27806 Document ! Settings
27807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27813 \begin_layout Subsection
27815 \begin_inset Index idx
27818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27819 Index ! Cross referencing
27827 \begin_layout Standard
27828 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27829 We referred for example in the index entry
27830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27838 \begin_inset space ~
27842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27844 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27848 ) to the index entry
27849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27856 in the same section using the entry
27859 \begin_layout Standard
27862 GIF|see{Image formats}
27865 \begin_layout Standard
27866 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27868 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27869 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27872 \begin_layout Subsection
27874 \begin_inset Index idx
27877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27878 Index ! Entry order
27886 \begin_layout Standard
27887 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27888 follow the rules for the index order.
27889 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27895 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27897 \begin_inset space ~
27901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27903 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27912 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27913 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27938 \begin_inset Index idx
27941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27942 Dummy entries ! maïs
27948 \begin_inset Index idx
27951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27952 Dummy entries ! maître
27958 \begin_inset Index idx
27961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27962 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27967 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27968 maïs, maison, maître.
27969 To achieve this, we use the command
27972 \begin_layout Standard
27975 previous entry@current entry
27978 \begin_layout Standard
27979 In our case we want to have
27980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27995 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27998 \begin_layout Standard
28004 \begin_layout Standard
28005 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28006 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28008 See the next subsection for an example.
28011 \begin_layout Standard
28012 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28018 \begin_layout Standard
28019 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28024 to generate the index (see sec.
28025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28031 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28040 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28041 -package aeguill in sec.
28042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28048 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28052 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28053 -packages although all these index
28054 commands start with
28055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28068 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28073 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28076 \begin_layout Standard
28088 \begin_layout Standard
28100 \begin_layout Subsection
28102 \begin_inset Index idx
28105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28106 Index ! Entry layout
28114 \begin_layout Standard
28115 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28116 \begin_inset Index idx
28119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28122 This is an italic dummy entry
28127 You can also format the page number using the character
28128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28135 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28136 -command without a backslash.
28137 We can write for example
28140 \begin_layout Standard
28143 italic page number:|textit
28146 \begin_layout Standard
28147 to get the page number in italic.
28148 \begin_inset Index idx
28151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28152 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28157 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28158 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28176 \begin_inset space ~
28182 Have a look at section
28183 \begin_inset space ~
28187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28189 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28193 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28197 \begin_layout Standard
28198 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28206 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28210 to generate the index, see sec.
28211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28217 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28226 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28231 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28232 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28235 key "latexcompanion"
28247 \begin_layout Standard
28248 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28250 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28251 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28252 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28253 If so, put the following in the preamble
28256 \begin_layout Standard
28268 \begin_layout Standard
28272 \begin_layout Standard
28278 \begin_layout Standard
28279 in the index entry.
28280 \begin_inset Index idx
28283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28284 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28289 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28290 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28291 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28294 \begin_layout Standard
28295 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28296 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28297 a bold font for all index entries.
28298 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28310 documentation for details,
28311 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28313 key "makeindex,xindy"
28320 \begin_layout Subsection
28322 \begin_inset Index idx
28325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28334 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28341 \begin_layout Standard
28342 If the index generation program
28346 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28347 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28351 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28352 distribution, is used.
28356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28361 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28362 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28363 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28364 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28365 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28375 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28377 dialog, see section
28378 \begin_inset space ~
28382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28384 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28389 The available options are listed and explained in
28390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28392 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28397 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28401 \begin_layout Standard
28402 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28403 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28406 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28407 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28411 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28412 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28415 \begin_layout Subsection
28419 \begin_layout Standard
28420 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28421 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28429 next to the standard index.
28431 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28432 that add this feature.
28439 \begin_inset Index idx
28442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28444 -packages ! splitidx
28449 package to generate multiple indexes.
28450 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28456 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28458 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28465 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28466 style, but it also includes
28467 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28468 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28476 \begin_layout Standard
28477 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28478 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28480 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28481 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28484 and select the option
28486 Use multiple Indexes
28493 already contains the standard index
28494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28502 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28503 also appear as a heading) to the
28507 input field and press the
28512 The new index now also appears in the list.
28513 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28514 label color to the new index.
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28518 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28528 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28529 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28530 are additional features:
28533 \begin_layout Itemize
28534 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28535 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28538 \begin_layout Itemize
28539 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28540 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28548 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28549 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28550 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28551 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28554 \begin_layout Section
28555 Nomenclature/Glossary
28556 \begin_inset Index idx
28559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28566 \begin_inset Index idx
28569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28600 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28607 \begin_layout Standard
28608 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28609 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28610 called nomenclature or glossary.
28613 \begin_layout Standard
28614 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28621 \begin_inset Index idx
28624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28626 -packages ! nomencl
28632 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28634 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28640 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28644 \begin_layout Standard
28645 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28646 and then use the menu
28648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28654 \begin_inset space ~
28659 or the toolbar button
28662 arg "nomencl-insert"
28667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28678 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28681 \begin_layout Standard
28682 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28683 The first is the term or
28687 that you wish to define.
28692 of the term or symbol.
28695 \begin_layout Standard
28696 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28704 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28705 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28713 \begin_layout Subsection
28714 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28715 \begin_inset Index idx
28718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28719 Nomenclature ! Layout
28727 \begin_layout Standard
28728 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28732 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28739 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28747 \begin_inset Newline newline
28755 \begin_inset Newline newline
28761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28768 character starts/ends the formula.
28769 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28770 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28782 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28792 \begin_layout Standard
28793 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28794 -syntax is given in section
28795 \begin_inset space ~
28799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28801 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28808 \begin_layout Standard
28812 \begin_inset space ~
28817 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28819 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28824 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28831 in this document is:
28832 \begin_inset Newline newline
28837 dummy entry for the character
28842 \begin_inset Newline newline
28854 \begin_inset space ~
28864 font use the command
28893 \begin_layout Standard
28894 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28899 \begin_inset space \space{}
28903 \begin_inset Newline newline
28919 \begin_inset Newline newline
28922 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28923 This command will make the font of all symbols
28930 \begin_inset space ~
28938 \begin_layout Standard
28939 If the characters |
28940 \begin_inset space \space{}
28944 \begin_inset space \space{}
28948 \begin_inset space \space{}
28952 \begin_inset space \space{}
28956 \begin_inset space \space{}
28959 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28960 a quote character in front of them.
28961 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28962 LatexCommand nomenclature
28963 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28964 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28971 \begin_layout Subsection
28972 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28973 \begin_inset Index idx
28976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28977 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28985 \begin_layout Standard
28986 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28987 -code of the symbol
28989 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28991 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28994 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28995 LatexCommand nomenclature
28997 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29004 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29008 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29009 LatexCommand nomenclature
29012 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29017 They will be sorted by
29018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29044 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29047 will be sorted before the
29051 since the character
29052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29059 is considered in sorting.
29062 \begin_layout Standard
29063 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29066 \begin_inset space ~
29071 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29072 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29074 For the example given, you can insert
29078 in this field for the
29079 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29086 will be located before
29087 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29093 \begin_layout Standard
29094 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29099 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29108 \begin_layout Subsection
29109 Nomenclature Options
29110 \begin_inset Index idx
29113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29114 Nomenclature ! Options
29122 \begin_layout Standard
29127 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29128 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29131 \begin_layout Description
29132 refeq Appends the phrase
29133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29148 to every nomenclature entry, where
29154 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29157 \begin_layout Description
29158 refpage Appends the phrase
29159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29174 to every nomenclature entry, where
29180 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29183 \begin_layout Description
29184 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29187 \begin_layout Standard
29188 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29189 class options list in the
29191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29195 In this document the options
29202 \begin_layout Standard
29203 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29209 \begin_layout Standard
29210 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29211 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29216 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29219 \begin_layout Description
29229 \begin_layout Description
29232 nomrefpage Like the
29239 \begin_layout Description
29242 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29251 \begin_layout Description
29255 \begin_inset space ~
29261 \begin_inset space ~
29266 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29269 \begin_layout Standard
29271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29278 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29279 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29283 \begin_layout Standard
29291 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29294 \begin_inset Newline newline
29301 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29306 \begin_inset Newline newline
29310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29325 by their translation.
29328 \begin_layout Subsection
29329 Printing the Nomenclature
29330 \begin_inset Index idx
29333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29334 Nomenclature ! Printing
29342 \begin_layout Standard
29343 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29346 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29362 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29363 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29364 You can choose between these settings:
29367 \begin_layout Description
29368 Default a space of 1
29369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29375 \begin_layout Description
29377 \begin_inset space ~
29381 \begin_inset space ~
29384 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29387 \begin_layout Description
29388 Custom custom space
29391 \begin_layout Standard
29392 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29401 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29409 For example, in order to change the name to
29413 , add the following line to the preamble:
29416 \begin_layout Standard
29424 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29427 \begin_layout Subsection
29428 Nomenclature Program
29429 \begin_inset Index idx
29432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29433 Nomenclature ! Program
29439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29441 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29448 \begin_layout Standard
29454 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29455 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29457 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29462 by adding options, see section
29463 \begin_inset space ~
29467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29469 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29474 The available options are listed and explained in
29475 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29477 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29484 \begin_layout Section
29486 \begin_inset Index idx
29489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29496 \begin_inset Index idx
29499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29500 Document ! Branches
29506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29508 name "sec:Branches"
29515 \begin_layout Standard
29516 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29517 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29518 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29519 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29522 \begin_layout Standard
29523 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29524 allows you to put text into branches.
29525 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29526 To create a branch, either select the menu
29528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29529 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29532 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29541 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29542 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29543 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29544 and whether the name of the branch should
29545 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29546 (see below for an example).
29547 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29548 to the name of the other) and to add
29549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29561 \begin_inset space ~
29564 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29565 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29568 \begin_layout Standard
29569 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29570 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29572 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29575 where you can choose a branch.
29576 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29580 \begin_layout Standard
29581 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29582 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29586 \begin_inset Branch Question
29589 \begin_layout Standard
29590 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29598 \begin_layout Standard
29599 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29602 \begin_layout Standard
29603 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29611 \begin_layout Standard
29618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29619 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29622 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29623 Consider for example a file
29624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29631 which has the above branches.
29633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29640 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29664 branch were inactive,
29665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29680 branch was active, likewise
29681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29696 branch was active, and
29697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29700 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29704 if both branches were active.
29705 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29708 \begin_layout Standard
29709 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29715 \begin_layout Standard
29716 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29717 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29718 definitions for each branch.
29719 For example you can define for the question branch
29723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29724 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29725 -syntax, see section
29726 \begin_inset space ~
29730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29732 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29754 \begin_layout Standard
29764 \begin_layout Standard
29765 and for the answer branch
29768 \begin_layout Standard
29778 \begin_layout Standard
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29789 \begin_inset Branch Question
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29824 \begin_layout Standard
29825 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29828 \begin_layout Standard
29832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29860 \begin_layout Standard
29861 Now it is possible to use the
29865 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29872 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29875 commands to obtain conditional output.
29876 Here is an example formula where only the
29883 \begin_inset Formula
29885 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29893 \begin_layout Standard
29894 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29902 \begin_layout Standard
29903 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29909 \begin_inset space \space{}
29912 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29914 For this advanced usage, see the
29919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29922 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29929 \begin_layout Section
29931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29933 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29938 \begin_inset Index idx
29941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29950 \begin_layout Standard
29953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29957 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29959 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29965 \begin_inset Index idx
29968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29970 -packages ! hyperref
29975 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29976 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29977 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29978 part of the document.
29982 \begin_layout Standard
29983 The header information in the dialog tab
29987 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29988 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29989 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29990 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29994 \begin_inset space ~
29998 \begin_inset space ~
30003 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30004 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30005 and author entries.
30009 \begin_inset space ~
30013 \begin_inset space ~
30017 \begin_inset space ~
30022 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30025 \begin_layout Standard
30026 You can specify in the dialog tab
30030 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30035 \begin_inset space ~
30039 \begin_inset space ~
30043 \begin_inset space ~
30048 option allows long links to be split;
30051 \begin_inset space ~
30055 \begin_inset space ~
30059 \begin_inset space ~
30067 \begin_inset space ~
30072 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30075 \begin_inset space ~
30080 colors the different links.
30081 The default colors are:
30084 \begin_layout Labeling
30085 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30090 for hyperlinks and URLs
30093 \begin_layout Labeling
30094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30102 \begin_layout Labeling
30103 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30111 \begin_layout Standard
30112 but you can change these in the field
30117 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30120 \begin_layout Standard
30123 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30126 \begin_layout Standard
30131 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30132 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30133 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30141 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30142 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30143 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30153 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30154 when opening the PDF.
30156 \begin_inset space ~
30159 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30160 \begin_inset space ~
30163 1 will only display the sections.
30166 \begin_layout Standard
30167 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30168 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30174 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30175 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30184 \begin_layout Section
30186 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30190 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30197 \begin_layout Subsection
30200 \begin_inset Index idx
30203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30213 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30220 \begin_layout Standard
30221 As \SpecialChar LyX
30222 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30223 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30224 commands and constructs,
30227 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30228 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30229 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30230 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30231 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30232 cannot support all packages and
30236 \begin_layout Standard
30237 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30238 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30239 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30243 Code box is created by the menu
30245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30247 \begin_inset space ~
30252 or by the toolbar button
30265 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30273 \begin_layout Standard
30274 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30276 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30278 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30279 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30286 , you can write the command part
30292 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30293 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30297 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30298 Code box behind the word.
30299 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30300 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30305 \begin_inset Graphics
30306 filename clipart/ERT.png
30314 \begin_layout Standard
30318 \begin_layout Standard
30319 This is a line with a
30323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30346 \begin_layout Standard
30347 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30355 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30356 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30357 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30358 know that the command is finished.
30366 \begin_layout Subsection
30367 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30369 \begin_inset Argument 1
30372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30373 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30380 \begin_inset Index idx
30383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30393 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30400 \begin_layout Standard
30401 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30402 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30403 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30404 uses in the background.
30405 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30406 is based on commands, you can
30407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30415 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30416 any time if you know the right commands.
30417 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30418 is the end of the day.
30419 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30420 all caption labels bold.
30421 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30423 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30427 \begin_layout Standard
30428 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30430 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30432 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30435 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30445 As result you find that the package
30450 \begin_inset Index idx
30453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30455 -packages ! caption
30461 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30463 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30466 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30470 \begin_inset space ~
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30483 usepackage[options]{package name}
30486 \begin_layout Standard
30487 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30488 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30489 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30490 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30493 \begin_layout Standard
30494 In your case the package name is
30499 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30504 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30505 So you add the command
30508 \begin_layout Standard
30513 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30516 \begin_layout Standard
30517 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30522 For more commands provided by the
30526 package, have a look at its documentation,
30527 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30541 \begin_layout Standard
30542 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30544 For example if you use a
30548 class, you don't need the package
30552 , you can instead write
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30560 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30565 \begin_layout Standard
30566 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30567 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30568 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30575 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30578 \begin_layout Standard
30579 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30580 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30582 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30583 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30584 Code box as described in the previous
30588 \begin_layout Standard
30589 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30590 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30593 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30595 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30602 \begin_layout Standard
30603 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30609 \begin_layout Standard
30613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30623 \begin_inset Note Note
30626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30627 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30635 \begin_layout Left Header
30636 \begin_inset Argument 1
30639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30659 \begin_inset Note Note
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30663 defines the header line as described below
30671 \begin_layout Center Header
30672 \begin_inset Argument 1
30675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30684 \begin_layout Right Header
30685 \begin_inset Argument 1
30688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30709 \begin_layout Left Footer
30710 \begin_inset Argument 1
30713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30734 \begin_layout Center Footer
30735 \begin_inset Argument 1
30738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30750 \begin_inset Newline newline
30754 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30760 \begin_layout Right Footer
30761 \begin_inset Argument 1
30764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30786 \begin_layout Section
30787 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30790 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30795 \begin_inset Index idx
30798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30799 Document ! Header/Footer line
30805 \begin_inset Index idx
30808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30817 \begin_layout Standard
30818 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30822 \begin_inset space ~
30833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30839 \begin_inset space ~
30845 As a second step add in the menu
30847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30848 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30855 Custom Header/Footerlines
30856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30860 This module offers the following 6
30861 \begin_inset space ~
30867 \begin_layout Description
30869 \begin_inset space ~
30873 \begin_inset space ~
30877 \begin_inset space ~
30881 \begin_inset space ~
30885 \begin_inset space ~
30891 \begin_layout Description
30893 \begin_inset space ~
30897 \begin_inset space ~
30901 \begin_inset space ~
30905 \begin_inset space ~
30909 \begin_inset space ~
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30916 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30919 \begin_layout Standard
30920 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30921 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30923 \begin_inset space ~
30927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30929 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30933 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30936 \begin_layout Standard
30937 \begin_inset Float figure
30943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30946 \begin_inset Tabular
30947 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30948 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30949 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30950 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30951 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30953 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30971 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30982 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31000 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31011 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31015 The normal text on the page goes here.
31016 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31018 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31019 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31024 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31033 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31044 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31062 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31073 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31109 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31114 name "fig:Page-layout"
31118 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31131 \begin_layout Standard
31132 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31140 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31144 \begin_inset space ~
31149 is set to “Default”.
31150 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31159 \begin_layout Subsection
31163 \begin_layout Standard
31164 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31165 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31166 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31167 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31169 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31170 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31173 \begin_layout Standard
31174 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31175 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31181 \begin_inset space ~
31189 \begin_layout Description
31192 thepage prints the current page number
31195 \begin_layout Description
31198 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31201 \begin_layout Description
31204 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31207 \begin_layout Description
31210 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31211 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31218 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31221 because it usually goes in a left header.
31224 \begin_layout Description
31227 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31228 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31230 It is normally used in the right header.
31233 \begin_layout Subsection
31234 Default header/footer
31237 \begin_layout Standard
31238 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31239 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31240 footer has the page number.
31241 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31242 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31243 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31246 \begin_inset space ~
31254 \begin_layout Subsection
31258 \begin_layout Standard
31259 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31260 Some pages are different.
31261 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31262 a new part or chapter in your book.
31263 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31264 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31265 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31269 Header and footer decoration line
31272 \begin_layout Standard
31273 By default, you get a 0.4
31274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31277 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31278 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31290 in the following way:
31293 \begin_layout Standard
31300 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31303 \begin_layout Standard
31304 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31313 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31320 \begin_layout Standard
31321 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31323 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31324 \begin_inset space ~
31328 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31338 Several header/footer lines
31341 \begin_layout Standard
31342 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31343 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31344 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31346 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31362 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31375 \begin_inset space ~
31383 \begin_layout Standard
31390 headheight}{height}
31393 \begin_layout Standard
31394 where height is a size in standard units.
31395 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31396 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31397 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31398 logfile with the menu
31400 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31406 \begin_inset space ~
31411 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31416 \begin_inset Index idx
31419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31421 -packages ! fancyhdr
31427 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31428 for your header/footer.
31431 \begin_layout Subsection
31435 \begin_layout Standard
31436 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31437 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31438 This example consists of the following definition:
31441 \begin_layout Description
31443 \begin_inset space ~
31452 , empty optional argument
31455 \begin_layout Description
31457 \begin_inset space ~
31460 Header empty, empty optional argument
31463 \begin_layout Description
31465 \begin_inset space ~
31474 in the optional argument
31477 \begin_layout Description
31479 \begin_inset space ~
31488 in the optional argument
31491 \begin_layout Description
31493 \begin_inset space ~
31506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31510 \begin_inset Newline newline
31514 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31521 in the optional argument
31524 \begin_layout Description
31526 \begin_inset space ~
31535 , empty optional argument
31538 \begin_layout Description
31541 headrulewidth set to 2
31542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31548 \begin_layout Standard
31549 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31550 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31556 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31565 \begin_layout Standard
31566 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31572 \begin_layout Standard
31576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31580 pagestyle{headings}
31586 \begin_inset Note Note
31589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31590 switches back to page style with the default headings
31598 \begin_layout Section
31599 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31602 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31607 \begin_inset Index idx
31610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31617 \begin_inset Index idx
31620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31629 \begin_layout Standard
31631 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31632 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31633 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31636 \begin_layout Subsection
31640 \begin_layout Standard
31641 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31647 \begin_inset Index idx
31650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31652 -packages ! preview-latex
31657 (on some systems named simply
31662 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31670 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31672 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31680 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31681 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31682 -package are automatically
31683 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31687 \begin_layout Subsection
31691 \begin_layout Standard
31692 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31693 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31695 activate the option
31698 \begin_inset space ~
31705 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31711 \begin_inset space ~
31715 \begin_inset space ~
31718 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31725 \begin_inset space ~
31738 \begin_inset space ~
31743 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31746 \begin_layout Standard
31747 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31752 \begin_inset space ~
31760 \begin_inset space ~
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31769 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31770 and when you finish
31774 \begin_layout Standard
31775 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31783 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31784 generated by activating the option
31787 \begin_inset space ~
31793 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31801 \begin_layout Subsection
31802 Selected document parts
31805 \begin_layout Standard
31806 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31807 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31808 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31809 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31811 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31813 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31817 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31818 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31819 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31822 \begin_layout Standard
31823 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31830 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31842 is explained in section
31844 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31849 \begin_inset space ~
31859 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31860 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31861 the final rotated boxes,
31862 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31863 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31865 Here is the result:
31868 \begin_layout Standard
31869 \begin_inset Preview
31871 \begin_layout Standard
31876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31880 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31886 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31896 height_special "totalheight"
31901 backgroundcolor "none"
31904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31929 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31935 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31957 \begin_layout Standard
31958 Previewing works also for colors.
31959 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31978 is explained in section
31985 \begin_inset space ~
31998 \begin_layout Standard
31999 \begin_inset Preview
32001 \begin_layout Standard
32005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32024 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32029 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32048 \begin_layout Standard
32049 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32055 \begin_layout Standard
32056 If \SpecialChar LyX
32057 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32058 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32059 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32060 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32061 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32062 the \SpecialChar TeX
32064 If \SpecialChar LyX
32065 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32066 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32068 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32069 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32070 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32073 \begin_layout Subsection
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32079 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32080 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32083 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32085 \begin_inset space ~
32090 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32092 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32094 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32095 's main window, then only this selection
32096 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32097 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32098 the source view window.
32103 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32104 ; but note that if you have
32105 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32107 not just the one which is open at the time.
32110 \begin_layout Section
32111 Advanced Find and Replace
32112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32114 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32119 \begin_inset Index idx
32122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32129 \begin_inset Index idx
32132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32141 \begin_layout Subsection
32145 \begin_layout Standard
32146 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32147 allows for searching of complex,
32148 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32150 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32151 The key-features are:
32154 \begin_layout Itemize
32155 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32156 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32157 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32161 \begin_layout Itemize
32162 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32163 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32164 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32165 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32168 \begin_layout Itemize
32169 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32170 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32171 outside of mathematics environments
32174 \begin_layout Itemize
32175 Search may be widened to a specific
32180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32184 \begin_inset space ~
32187 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32188 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32195 \begin_layout Itemize
32196 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32197 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32202 \begin_inset space ~
32205 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32208 \begin_layout Subsection
32212 \begin_layout Standard
32213 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32215 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32228 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32231 ) or the toolbar button
32234 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32240 Advanced Find and Replace
32245 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32249 \begin_layout Standard
32255 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32259 \begin_inset space ~
32264 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32267 arg "paragraph-break"
32271 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32272 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32276 arg "paragraph-break"
32279 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32283 searches backwards.
32286 \begin_layout Standard
32290 \begin_inset space ~
32295 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32304 \begin_inset space ~
32309 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32313 Searching for mathematics
32316 \begin_layout Standard
32317 Mathematical formulas, such as
32318 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32321 or something more complex like
32322 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32325 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32330 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32331 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32332 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32333 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32343 \begin_layout Standard
32344 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32345 This is done by switching to the
32349 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32354 This way, entering in the
32361 \begin_layout Itemize
32362 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32363 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32366 \begin_layout Itemize
32367 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32368 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32371 \begin_layout Itemize
32372 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32373 of it only within section headings.
32374 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32375 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32379 \begin_layout Itemize
32380 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32381 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32388 \begin_layout Standard
32389 The entries made in the
32393 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32396 \begin_inset space ~
32402 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32406 button or alternatively press
32409 arg "paragraph-break"
32416 while the cursor is in the
32419 \begin_inset space ~
32427 \begin_layout Standard
32428 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32430 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32434 \begin_layout Itemize
32435 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32436 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32444 with its typewriter version
32445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32459 \begin_layout Itemize
32460 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32466 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32478 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32485 (you may want to enable the
32488 \begin_inset space ~
32496 \begin_inset space ~
32501 options and disable the
32509 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32517 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32518 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32522 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32525 , or occurrences of
32526 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32530 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32536 \begin_layout Subsection
32540 \begin_layout Standard
32541 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32546 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32548 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32550 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32559 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32565 This is done with the context menu
32567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32568 Insert Regular Expression
32570 while the cursor is in the
32575 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32576 expression matching rules
32580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32581 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32588 \begin_inset space ~
32591 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32592 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32598 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32599 same text in the document.
32600 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32601 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32604 \begin_layout Enumerate
32605 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32610 editor the fraction
32611 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32615 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32618 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32619 fractions with the given denominator.
32622 \begin_layout Enumerate
32623 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32635 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32640 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32641 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32642 Also, by inserting a
32643 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32646 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32647 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32650 \begin_layout Standard
32651 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32652 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32653 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32656 , and referring back to them through
32657 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32661 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32665 For example, try searching with the regexp
32666 \begin_inset Newline newline
32669 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32672 \begin_inset Newline newline
32675 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32678 \begin_layout Standard
32679 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32682 \begin_layout Standard
32683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32691 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32692 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32693 sub-expressions is absolute.
32695 \begin_inset space ~
32699 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32702 always refers to the first occurrence of
32703 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32706 in all entered regexps.
32714 \begin_layout Section
32716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32718 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32723 \begin_inset Index idx
32726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32735 \begin_layout Standard
32737 has a built-in spell checker.
32740 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32747 key or the toolbar button
32750 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32753 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32754 beginning of the currently selected text.
32755 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32756 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32757 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32758 scrolled so that it is visible.
32759 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32760 n, if any could be found.
32761 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32765 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32766 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32769 \begin_layout Standard
32770 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32777 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32778 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32780 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32781 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32784 \begin_inset space ~
32792 arg "dialog-show character"
32795 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32797 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32800 \begin_layout Standard
32801 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32802 can be downloaded from here:
32803 \begin_inset Newline newline
32807 \begin_inset Flex URL
32810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32812 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32818 \begin_inset Newline newline
32822 \begin_inset space ~
32825 files for each language.
32826 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32827 \begin_inset space ~
32830 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32831 's installation subfolder
32839 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32841 \begin_inset Newline newline
32844 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32845 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32846 but in most cases these are
32862 is the language code.
32865 \begin_layout Subsection
32869 \begin_layout Standard
32872 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32873 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32875 \begin_inset space ~
32878 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32881 you can set the following things:
32884 \begin_layout Description
32886 \begin_inset space ~
32889 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32890 should use for spell checking.
32891 Depending on your platform,
32905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32906 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32907 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32922 \begin_inset space ~
32925 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32928 \begin_layout Description
32930 \begin_inset space ~
32933 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32934 will always use the given language
32935 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32938 \begin_layout Description
32940 \begin_inset space ~
32943 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32949 \begin_inset space \space{}
32953 This should normally not be needed.
32956 \begin_layout Description
32958 \begin_inset space ~
32962 \begin_inset space ~
32965 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32977 \begin_layout Description
32979 \begin_inset space ~
32982 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32983 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32984 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32985 appear in a context menu.
32986 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32990 \begin_layout Description
32992 \begin_inset space ~
32996 \begin_inset space ~
33000 \begin_inset space ~
33003 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33007 \begin_layout Section
33009 \begin_inset Index idx
33012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33021 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33028 \begin_layout Standard
33030 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33031 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33043 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33052 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33054 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33055 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33056 which are available for many languages.
33059 \begin_layout Standard
33060 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33061 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33065 \begin_layout Subsection
33066 Setting up the thesaurus
33069 \begin_layout Standard
33078 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33082 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33087 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33093 \begin_inset space ~
33101 For instance, the US English files are named:
33104 \begin_layout Itemize
33108 \begin_layout Itemize
33112 \begin_layout Standard
33121 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33122 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33125 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33126 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33127 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33129 \begin_inset space ~
33134 ) to the path where they are installed.
33138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33139 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33140 ies, typical locations are
33146 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33150 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33154 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33157 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33163 LibreOffice-<Version>
33170 On the Mac, the default location is
33172 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33173 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33174 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33175 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33176 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33177 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33185 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33186 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33187 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33191 \begin_layout Standard
33192 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33193 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33197 \begin_layout Itemize
33198 \begin_inset Flex URL
33201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33203 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33211 \begin_layout Standard
33212 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33213 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33215 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33216 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33217 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33219 \begin_inset space ~
33224 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33226 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33227 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33231 \begin_layout Standard
33232 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33234 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33237 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33243 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33246 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33247 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33255 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33256 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33257 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33259 \begin_inset space ~
33264 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33267 \begin_layout Subsection
33268 Using the thesaurus
33271 \begin_layout Standard
33272 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33274 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33277 or the toolbar button
33280 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33283 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33285 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33287 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33288 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33289 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33298 ), related terms (such as
33301 \begin_inset space ~
33310 ), compounds (such as
33313 \begin_inset space ~
33322 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33331 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33334 \begin_layout Standard
33335 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33336 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33340 \begin_layout Standard
33341 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33342 the dictionary, such as the above
33346 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33351 \begin_inset space \space{}
33354 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33355 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33356 For example, looking up the word form
33360 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33365 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33370 \begin_inset space \space{}
33381 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33382 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33383 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33386 \begin_layout Section
33388 \begin_inset Index idx
33391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33398 \begin_inset Index idx
33401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33402 Document ! Change Tracking
33408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33410 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33417 \begin_layout Standard
33418 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33419 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33420 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33421 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33423 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33425 \begin_inset space ~
33428 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33430 \begin_inset space ~
33438 \begin_layout Standard
33439 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33453 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33454 You can change the color in
33456 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33457 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33459 \begin_inset space ~
33463 \begin_inset space ~
33468 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33474 \begin_inset Index idx
33477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33478 Color ! Change tracking
33483 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33484 's status bar when the
33485 cursor is in changed text.
33486 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33489 arg "changes-merge"
33495 \begin_layout Standard
33496 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33498 \begin_inset Index idx
33501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33510 \begin_layout Standard
33511 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33517 \begin_layout Standard
33518 \begin_inset Graphics
33519 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33527 \begin_layout Standard
33528 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33534 \begin_layout Standard
33535 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33538 \begin_layout Standard
33539 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33545 \begin_layout Standard
33546 \begin_inset Tabular
33547 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33548 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33549 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33550 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33551 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33560 arg "changes-track"
33568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33574 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33576 \begin_inset space ~
33579 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33581 \begin_inset space ~
33590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33599 arg "changes-output"
33607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33615 \begin_inset space ~
33618 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33620 \begin_inset space ~
33624 \begin_inset space ~
33628 \begin_inset space ~
33637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33658 Jumps to the next change
33664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33673 arg "change-accept"
33681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33689 \begin_inset space ~
33692 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33694 \begin_inset space ~
33703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33712 arg "change-reject"
33720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33728 \begin_inset space ~
33731 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33733 \begin_inset space ~
33742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33751 arg "changes-merge"
33759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33767 \begin_inset space ~
33770 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33772 \begin_inset space ~
33781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33790 arg "all-changes-accept"
33798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33806 \begin_inset space ~
33809 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33815 \begin_inset space ~
33824 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33833 arg "all-changes-reject"
33841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33849 \begin_inset space ~
33852 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33854 \begin_inset space ~
33858 \begin_inset space ~
33867 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33890 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33891 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33893 \begin_inset space ~
33902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33925 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33927 \begin_inset space ~
33943 \begin_layout Standard
33944 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33950 \begin_layout Standard
33951 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33971 \begin_layout Standard
33972 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33973 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33974 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33975 the next change after the current cursor position.
33976 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33977 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33978 step to the next change.
33979 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33982 \begin_layout Standard
33983 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33984 to describe a change.
33987 \begin_layout Standard
33988 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33994 \begin_inset Index idx
33997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33999 -packages ! dvipost
34005 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34007 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34013 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34017 \begin_layout Section
34018 Comparison of Documents
34019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34021 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34026 \begin_inset Index idx
34029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 Comparison of documents
34038 \begin_layout Standard
34039 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34042 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34046 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34047 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34049 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34051 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34055 \begin_inset space ~
34059 \begin_inset space ~
34063 \begin_inset space ~
34072 \begin_inset space ~
34076 \begin_inset space ~
34080 \begin_inset space ~
34084 \begin_inset space ~
34088 \begin_inset space ~
34092 \begin_inset space ~
34097 enables the change tracking option
34100 \begin_inset space ~
34104 \begin_inset space ~
34108 \begin_inset space ~
34113 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34116 \begin_layout Section
34117 International Support
34118 \begin_inset Index idx
34121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34122 International support
34130 \begin_layout Standard
34131 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34132 with any language you want.
34133 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34134 up \SpecialChar LyX
34136 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34138 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34145 \begin_layout Standard
34146 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34147 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34148 \begin_inset space ~
34152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34154 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34161 \begin_layout Subsection
34163 \begin_inset Index idx
34166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34173 \begin_inset Index idx
34176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34177 Document ! Settings
34183 \begin_inset Index idx
34186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34187 Document ! Language
34195 \begin_layout Standard
34198 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34199 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34202 dialog lets you set
34204 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34209 \begin_layout Standard
34214 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34219 \begin_inset space ~
34224 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34225 For details about the different encoding options see section
34226 \begin_inset space ~
34230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34232 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34239 \begin_layout Subsection
34240 Keyboard mapping configuration
34241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34243 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34250 \begin_layout Standard
34251 If you have for example a U.
34252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34255 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34256 can use an alternate keymap.
34257 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34262 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34263 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34264 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34267 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34268 \begin_inset space ~
34272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34274 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34279 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34280 which one you want to use.
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34284 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34285 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34286 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34290 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34291 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34292 one to support the characters you want.
34293 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34300 \begin_layout Chapter
34303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34305 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34313 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34314 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34315 topic inside the user's guide.
34318 \begin_layout Section
34320 \begin_inset Index idx
34323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34332 \begin_layout Standard
34337 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34340 \begin_layout Subsection
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34345 Creates a new document.
34348 \begin_layout Subsection
34352 \begin_layout Standard
34353 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34354 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34355 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34358 \begin_layout Subsection
34362 \begin_layout Standard
34366 \begin_layout Subsection
34370 \begin_layout Standard
34371 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34372 Click there on a file to open it.
34375 \begin_layout Subsection
34379 \begin_layout Standard
34380 Closes the current document.
34383 \begin_layout Subsection
34387 \begin_layout Standard
34388 Closes all opened documents.
34391 \begin_layout Subsection
34395 \begin_layout Standard
34396 Saves the actual document.
34399 \begin_layout Subsection
34403 \begin_layout Standard
34404 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34407 \begin_layout Subsection
34411 \begin_layout Standard
34412 Saves all opened documents.
34415 \begin_layout Subsection
34419 \begin_layout Standard
34420 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34423 \begin_layout Subsection
34427 \begin_layout Standard
34428 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34429 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34430 It is described in the section
34432 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34437 Additional Features
34442 \begin_layout Subsection
34446 \begin_layout Standard
34447 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34448 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34450 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34451 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34455 \begin_layout Standard
34456 When using the menu entry
34459 \begin_inset space ~
34464 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34468 \begin_inset space ~
34472 \begin_inset space ~
34476 \begin_inset space ~
34481 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34482 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34485 \begin_layout Subsection
34487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34489 name "subsec:Export"
34496 \begin_layout Standard
34497 You can export your document to various file formats.
34498 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34500 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34501 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34502 during its configuration.
34505 \begin_layout Standard
34506 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34508 \begin_inset space ~
34512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34514 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34521 \begin_layout Description
34527 \begin_inset space ~
34530 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34532 \begin_inset space ~
34535 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34536 \begin_inset Newline newline
34539 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34540 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34544 \begin_layout Description
34545 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34551 \begin_layout Description
34553 \begin_inset space ~
34556 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34562 \begin_layout Description
34563 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34564 's native DVI-format.
34565 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34566 files paths or file names in your document.
34568 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34575 \begin_layout Description
34576 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34577 in files paths or file names
34580 \begin_layout Description
34582 \begin_inset space ~
34589 ) DVI-format using the program
34591 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34594 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34598 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34606 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34614 \begin_layout Description
34616 \begin_inset space ~
34619 (cropped) the same as
34623 but with cropped page margins.
34626 \begin_layout Description
34628 \begin_inset space ~
34631 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34635 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34640 \begin_layout Description
34644 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34652 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34660 \begin_layout Description
34662 \begin_inset space ~
34666 \begin_inset space ~
34669 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34673 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34681 \begin_layout Description
34685 \begin_inset space ~
34694 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34695 source that is compilable with the program
34697 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34701 \begin_layout Description
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34710 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34711 source, additionally all images used in the document
34712 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34716 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34719 \begin_layout Description
34723 \begin_inset space ~
34728 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34729 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34730 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34738 \begin_layout Description
34742 \begin_inset space ~
34751 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34752 source that is compilable with the program
34758 \begin_layout Description
34760 \begin_inset space ~
34764 \begin_inset space ~
34771 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34772 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34778 \begin_layout Description
34780 \begin_inset space ~
34783 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34784 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34790 \begin_inset space \space{}
34795 \begin_inset space ~
34799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34814 represent the version number)
34817 \begin_layout Description
34819 \begin_inset space ~
34823 \begin_inset space ~
34826 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34827 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34828 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34832 \begin_layout Description
34833 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34834 's internal XHTML engine
34837 \begin_layout Description
34838 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34843 \begin_layout Description
34844 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34846 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34849 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34853 \begin_layout Description
34855 \begin_inset space ~
34858 (cropped) the same as
34861 \begin_inset space ~
34866 but with cropped page margins
34869 \begin_layout Description
34873 \begin_inset space ~
34878 PDF-format using the program
34882 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34885 \begin_layout Description
34889 \begin_inset space ~
34893 \begin_inset space ~
34901 \begin_inset space ~
34906 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34911 \begin_inset space \space{}
34914 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34918 \begin_layout Description
34922 \begin_inset space ~
34927 PDF-format using the program
34929 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34932 , produces PDF-files directly
34935 \begin_layout Description
34939 \begin_inset space ~
34944 PDF-format using the program
34948 , produces PDF-files directly
34951 \begin_layout Description
34955 \begin_inset space ~
34960 PDF-format using the program
34964 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34967 \begin_layout Description
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34976 PDF-format using the program
34981 , produces PDF-files directly
34984 \begin_layout Description
34988 \begin_inset space ~
34996 \begin_layout Description
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35004 \begin_inset space ~
35009 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35010 and then exported as text using the program
35015 \begin_layout Description
35020 PostScript format using the program
35025 \begin_layout Description
35026 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35027 source and also code in the statistical programming
35041 it is possible to use
35045 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35049 \begin_layout Standard
35050 If one of the menu entries
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35066 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35068 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35070 \begin_inset space ~
35074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35076 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35081 \begin_inset Index idx
35084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35085 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35094 \begin_layout Subsection
35098 \begin_layout Standard
35099 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35100 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35103 \begin_inset space ~
35107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35109 reference "sec:Paths"
35114 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35123 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35124 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35125 's preferences as described in section
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35132 reference "subsec:Converters"
35139 \begin_layout Subsection
35140 New and Close Window
35143 \begin_layout Standard
35144 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35148 \begin_layout Subsection
35152 \begin_layout Standard
35153 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35156 \begin_layout Section
35158 \begin_inset Index idx
35161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35170 \begin_layout Subsection
35174 \begin_layout Standard
35175 Described in section
35176 \begin_inset space ~
35180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35182 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35189 \begin_layout Subsection
35190 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35193 \begin_layout Standard
35194 Described in section
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35201 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35208 \begin_layout Subsection
35212 \begin_layout Standard
35213 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35214 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35217 \begin_layout Subsection
35221 \begin_layout Standard
35222 Selects the whole document.
35225 \begin_layout Subsection
35226 Find & Replace (Quick)
35229 \begin_layout Standard
35230 Described in section
35231 \begin_inset space ~
35235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35237 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35244 \begin_layout Subsection
35245 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35248 \begin_layout Standard
35249 Described in section
35250 \begin_inset space ~
35254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35256 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35263 \begin_layout Subsection
35264 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35267 \begin_layout Standard
35268 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35272 \begin_layout Subsection
35276 \begin_layout Standard
35277 Described in section
35278 \begin_inset space ~
35282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35284 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35291 \begin_layout Subsection
35293 \begin_inset Index idx
35296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35297 Paragraph ! Settings
35305 \begin_layout Standard
35306 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35307 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35311 \begin_layout Standard
35312 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35313 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35319 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35320 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35322 \begin_inset space ~
35330 \begin_layout Subsection
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35335 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35336 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35337 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35341 \begin_layout Standard
35342 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35344 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35345 The properties of tables are described in section
35346 \begin_inset space ~
35350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35352 reference "sec:Tables"
35356 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35357 \begin_inset space ~
35361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35363 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35370 \begin_layout Subsection
35371 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35374 \begin_layout Standard
35375 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35377 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35378 \begin_inset space ~
35382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35384 reference "sec:Nesting"
35389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35391 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35398 \begin_layout Subsection
35401 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35404 \begin_layout Standard
35405 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35406 nts of the same type.
35408 \begin_inset space ~
35412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35414 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35418 for an explanation.
35421 \begin_layout Section
35423 \begin_inset Index idx
35426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35435 \begin_layout Standard
35436 At the bottom of the
35440 menu the opened documents are listed.
35443 \begin_layout Subsection
35444 Open/Close all Insets
35447 \begin_layout Standard
35448 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35451 \begin_layout Subsection
35452 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35455 \begin_layout Standard
35456 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35459 \begin_layout Standard
35460 Math macros are described in the
35467 \begin_layout Subsection
35471 \begin_layout Standard
35472 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35473 \begin_inset space ~
35477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35479 reference "sec:Navigating"
35484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35486 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35493 \begin_layout Subsection
35497 \begin_layout Standard
35498 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35500 \begin_inset space ~
35504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35506 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35513 \begin_layout Subsection
35517 \begin_layout Standard
35518 Opens a window showing console messages.
35519 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35524 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35525 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35526 is processing the document.
35529 \begin_layout Subsection
35531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35533 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35538 \begin_inset Index idx
35541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35550 \begin_layout Standard
35551 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35552 All toolbars and the
35555 \begin_inset space ~
35560 can be turned on and off.
35565 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35594 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35598 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35605 \begin_layout Standard
35610 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35614 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35615 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35616 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35617 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35618 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35623 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35624 \begin_inset space ~
35628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35630 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35637 \begin_layout Subsection
35641 \begin_layout Standard
35645 \begin_inset space ~
35649 \begin_inset space ~
35653 \begin_inset space ~
35657 \begin_inset space ~
35661 \begin_inset space ~
35665 \begin_inset space ~
35670 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35671 's main window vertically while
35674 \begin_inset space ~
35678 \begin_inset space ~
35682 \begin_inset space ~
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35690 \begin_inset space ~
35694 \begin_inset space ~
35699 will split it horizontally.
35700 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35701 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35702 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35703 three or more documents at the same time.
35704 To close a split view, use the menu
35707 \begin_inset space ~
35711 \begin_inset space ~
35719 \begin_layout Subsection
35723 \begin_layout Standard
35724 Closes a split view.
35727 \begin_layout Subsection
35731 \begin_layout Standard
35732 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35733 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35734 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35735 's main window fullscreen.
35736 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35737 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35740 \begin_layout Section
35742 \begin_inset Index idx
35745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35754 \begin_layout Subsection
35758 \begin_layout Standard
35759 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35760 \begin_inset space ~
35764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35766 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35777 \begin_layout Subsection
35779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35781 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35788 \begin_layout Standard
35789 Here you can insert the following characters:
35792 \begin_layout Description
35797 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35800 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35801 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35802 -packages you have installed.
35803 You can get a complete display by checking
35806 \begin_inset space ~
35812 \begin_inset Newline newline
35816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35824 Not all characters will be visible in the
35828 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35836 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35840 ) can display every character.
35848 \begin_layout Description
35849 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35853 \begin_layout Description
35855 \begin_inset space ~
35859 \begin_inset space ~
35862 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35863 \begin_inset space ~
35867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35869 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35876 \begin_layout Description
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35881 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35885 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35891 \begin_layout Description
35893 \begin_inset space ~
35896 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35899 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35900 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35906 \begin_layout Description
35908 \begin_inset space ~
35911 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35915 \begin_layout Description
35917 \begin_inset space ~
35920 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35924 \begin_layout Description
35926 \begin_inset space ~
35929 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35935 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35941 \begin_layout Description
35943 \begin_inset space ~
35946 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35950 \begin_layout Description
35952 \begin_inset space ~
35956 \begin_inset Index idx
35959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35966 \begin_inset Index idx
35969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35970 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35975 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35976 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35978 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35984 \begin_inset Index idx
35987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35995 \begin_inset Newline newline
35998 More information about this feature can be found in the
36004 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36010 \begin_layout Subsection
36014 \begin_layout Standard
36015 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36018 \begin_layout Description
36019 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36020 \begin_inset script superscript
36022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36031 \begin_layout Description
36032 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36033 \begin_inset script subscript
36035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36044 \begin_layout Description
36046 \begin_inset space ~
36049 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36050 \begin_inset space ~
36054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36056 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36063 \begin_layout Description
36065 \begin_inset space ~
36068 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36075 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36082 \begin_layout Description
36084 \begin_inset space ~
36087 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36094 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36101 \begin_layout Description
36103 \begin_inset space ~
36106 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36112 \begin_inset space \space{}
36115 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36116 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36125 To insert a fraction use the command
36130 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36134 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36143 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36150 \begin_layout Description
36152 \begin_inset space ~
36155 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36162 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36169 \begin_layout Description
36171 \begin_inset space ~
36174 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36175 \begin_inset space ~
36179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36181 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36188 \begin_layout Description
36190 \begin_inset space ~
36193 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36200 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36207 \begin_layout Description
36208 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36209 \begin_inset space ~
36213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36215 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36222 \begin_layout Description
36224 \begin_inset space ~
36227 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36234 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36241 \begin_layout Description
36243 \begin_inset space ~
36246 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36247 \begin_inset space ~
36251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36253 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36260 \begin_layout Description
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36266 \begin_inset space ~
36269 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36270 \begin_inset space ~
36274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36276 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36283 \begin_layout Description
36285 \begin_inset space ~
36288 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36289 as described in section
36290 \begin_inset space ~
36294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36296 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36303 \begin_layout Description
36305 \begin_inset space ~
36308 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36309 \begin_inset space ~
36313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36315 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36322 \begin_layout Description
36324 \begin_inset space ~
36327 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36328 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36330 \begin_inset space ~
36334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36336 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36343 \begin_layout Description
36345 \begin_inset space ~
36348 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36355 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36362 \begin_layout Description
36364 \begin_inset space ~
36368 \begin_inset space ~
36371 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36372 \begin_inset space ~
36376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36378 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36385 \begin_layout Subsection
36389 \begin_layout Standard
36390 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36415 are described in section
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36422 reference "sec:toc"
36431 is described in section
36432 \begin_inset space ~
36436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36438 reference "sec:Index"
36446 is described in section
36447 \begin_inset space ~
36451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36453 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36459 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36462 is described in section
36463 \begin_inset space ~
36467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36469 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36476 \begin_layout Subsection
36480 \begin_layout Standard
36481 To insert floats, as described in section
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36488 reference "sec:Floats"
36492 and in detail the chapter
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36507 \begin_layout Subsection
36511 \begin_layout Standard
36512 To insert notes, described in section
36513 \begin_inset space ~
36517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36519 reference "sec:Notes"
36526 \begin_layout Subsection
36530 \begin_layout Standard
36531 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36533 Branches are described in section
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36540 reference "sec:Branches"
36547 \begin_layout Subsection
36551 \begin_layout Standard
36552 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36553 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36555 An example is the document class
36556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36563 with three custom insets.
36566 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36570 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36576 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36579 \begin_layout Subsection
36581 \begin_inset Index idx
36584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36593 \begin_layout Standard
36594 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36596 For more information see chapter
36598 External Document Parts
36601 \begin_inset space ~
36607 \begin_layout Subsection
36609 \begin_inset Index idx
36612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36621 \begin_layout Standard
36622 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36623 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36630 \begin_inset space ~
36638 \begin_layout Subsection
36642 \begin_layout Standard
36647 dialog as described in section
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36654 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36661 \begin_layout Subsection
36665 \begin_layout Standard
36670 as described in section
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36677 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36684 \begin_layout Subsection
36688 \begin_layout Standard
36693 as described in section
36694 \begin_inset space ~
36698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36700 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36707 \begin_layout Subsection
36709 \begin_inset Index idx
36712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36719 \begin_inset Index idx
36722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36723 Longtables ! Caption
36731 \begin_layout Standard
36732 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36733 Floats are described in section
36734 \begin_inset space ~
36738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36740 reference "sec:Floats"
36744 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36759 \begin_layout Subsection
36763 \begin_layout Standard
36764 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36765 \begin_inset space ~
36769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36771 reference "sec:Index"
36778 \begin_layout Subsection
36782 \begin_layout Standard
36783 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36784 \begin_inset space ~
36788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36790 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36797 \begin_layout Subsection
36801 \begin_layout Standard
36802 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36803 Tables are described in section
36804 \begin_inset space ~
36808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36810 reference "sec:Tables"
36814 and in detail in the chapter
36821 \begin_inset space ~
36829 \begin_layout Subsection
36833 \begin_layout Standard
36839 Graphics are described in section
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36846 reference "sec:Graphics"
36853 \begin_layout Subsection
36857 \begin_layout Standard
36858 Inserts a URL as described in section
36859 \begin_inset space ~
36863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36865 reference "subsec:URLs"
36872 \begin_layout Subsection
36876 \begin_layout Standard
36877 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36884 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36891 \begin_layout Subsection
36895 \begin_layout Standard
36896 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36897 \begin_inset space ~
36901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36903 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36910 \begin_layout Subsection
36914 \begin_layout Standard
36915 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36916 \begin_inset space ~
36920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36922 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36929 \begin_layout Subsection
36933 \begin_layout Standard
36934 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36935 title or caption of a float.
36936 Inserts a short title as described in section
36937 \begin_inset space ~
36941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36943 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36950 \begin_layout Subsection
36955 \begin_layout Standard
36956 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36957 Code box as described in section
36958 \begin_inset space ~
36962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36964 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36971 \begin_layout Subsection
36973 \begin_inset Index idx
36976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36985 \begin_layout Standard
36986 Inserts a program listings box.
36987 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36989 Program Code Listings
36994 \begin_inset space ~
37002 \begin_layout Subsection
37006 \begin_layout Standard
37007 Inserts the actual date.
37008 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37012 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37020 \begin_inset space ~
37028 \begin_layout Subsection
37032 \begin_layout Standard
37033 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37034 \begin_inset space ~
37038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37040 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37047 \begin_layout Section
37049 \begin_inset Index idx
37052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37061 \begin_layout Standard
37062 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37063 \begin_inset space ~
37066 of the current document.
37067 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37070 \begin_layout Subsection
37074 \begin_layout Standard
37075 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37076 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37077 to jump, for example, between section
37078 \begin_inset space ~
37082 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37083 \begin_inset space ~
37086 2.5 and use the submenu
37089 \begin_inset space ~
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37100 \begin_inset space ~
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37110 \begin_inset space ~
37116 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37120 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37126 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37129 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37132 \begin_layout Standard
37133 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37142 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37145 \begin_inset space ~
37150 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37153 \begin_layout Subsection
37154 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37157 \begin_layout Standard
37158 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37162 \begin_layout Subsection
37166 \begin_layout Standard
37167 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37168 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37169 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37185 \begin_layout Subsection
37189 \begin_layout Standard
37190 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37193 The \SpecialChar LyX
37194 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37196 \begin_inset space ~
37204 \begin_inset space ~
37209 manual for a detailed description.
37212 \begin_layout Section
37214 \begin_inset Index idx
37217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37226 \begin_layout Subsection
37230 \begin_layout Standard
37231 Change Tracking is described in section
37232 \begin_inset space ~
37236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37238 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37245 \begin_layout Subsection
37253 \begin_layout Standard
37254 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37255 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37256 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37258 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37259 to the clipboard or update the view.
37260 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37264 \begin_layout Subsection
37265 Start Appendix Here
37268 \begin_layout Standard
37269 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37270 as described in section
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37277 reference "sec:Appendices"
37284 \begin_layout Subsection
37286 \begin_inset space ~
37292 \begin_layout Standard
37293 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37294 default output format for the document (menu
37296 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37297 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37298 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37300 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \begin_inset space ~
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37316 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37320 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37324 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37326 \begin_inset space ~
37329 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37334 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37336 \begin_inset space ~
37340 \begin_inset space ~
37346 \begin_inset space ~
37350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37352 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37356 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37357 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37359 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37360 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37362 \begin_inset space ~
37365 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37367 \begin_inset space ~
37370 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37374 \begin_inset space ~
37378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37380 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37385 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37386 when it is first configured.
37387 The default output format is
37390 \begin_inset space ~
37398 \begin_layout Subsection
37399 View (Other Formats)
37402 \begin_layout Standard
37403 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37404 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37405 actual document with an external program.
37406 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37407 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37408 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37410 All possible formats are listed in section
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37417 reference "subsec:Export"
37422 You should at least see the menu entry
37427 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37429 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37431 \begin_inset space ~
37435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37437 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37442 \begin_inset Index idx
37445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37446 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37455 \begin_layout Standard
37456 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37457 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37459 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37460 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37462 \begin_inset space ~
37465 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37467 \begin_inset space ~
37470 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37474 \begin_inset space ~
37478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37480 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37485 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37486 when it is first configured.
37489 \begin_layout Subsection
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37497 \begin_layout Standard
37498 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37499 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37502 \begin_layout Subsection
37503 Update (Other Formats)
37506 \begin_layout Standard
37507 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37508 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37511 \begin_layout Subsection
37512 View Master Document
37515 \begin_layout Standard
37516 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37537 manual for more information on this topic).
37538 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37539 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37543 \begin_inset space ~
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37552 generates the output of the whole book, while
37556 will just output the chapter alone.
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37560 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37561 in the document settings (menu
37563 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37564 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37565 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37571 \begin_inset space ~
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37583 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37587 ) or in the preferences (menu
37589 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37590 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37595 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37597 \begin_inset space ~
37600 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37602 \begin_inset space ~
37606 \begin_inset space ~
37612 \begin_inset space ~
37616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37618 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37625 \begin_layout Subsection
37626 Update Master Document
37629 \begin_layout Standard
37630 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37651 manual for more information on this topic).
37652 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37653 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37656 \begin_layout Standard
37657 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37658 in the document settings (menu
37660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37661 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37662 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37674 \begin_inset space ~
37678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37680 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37684 ) or in the preferences (menu
37686 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37687 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37692 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37694 \begin_inset space ~
37697 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37699 \begin_inset space ~
37703 \begin_inset space ~
37709 \begin_inset space ~
37713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37715 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37722 \begin_layout Subsection
37724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37726 name "subsec:Compressed"
37733 \begin_layout Standard
37734 Un/compresses the current document.
37735 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37736 compression (see the
37738 Additional Features
37740 manual for details).
37743 \begin_layout Subsection
37747 \begin_layout Standard
37748 The document settings are described in appendix
37749 \begin_inset space ~
37753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37755 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37762 \begin_layout Section
37764 \begin_inset Index idx
37767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37776 \begin_layout Subsection
37780 \begin_layout Standard
37781 Spell checking is explained in section
37782 \begin_inset space ~
37786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37788 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37795 \begin_layout Subsection
37799 \begin_layout Standard
37800 The thesaurus is described in section
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37807 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37814 \begin_layout Subsection
37816 \begin_inset Index idx
37819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37826 \begin_inset Index idx
37829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37838 \begin_layout Standard
37839 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37840 the highlighted document part.
37843 \begin_layout Subsection
37849 \begin_inset Index idx
37852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37853 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37862 \begin_layout Standard
37863 Generates with the help of the program
37865 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37868 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37869 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37870 This feature is not available on Windows.
37873 \begin_layout Subsection
37879 \begin_inset Index idx
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37893 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37898 \begin_inset space ~
37903 to see the full filename paths.
37906 \begin_layout Subsection
37908 \begin_inset Index idx
37911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37920 \begin_layout Standard
37921 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37922 files as described in section
37923 \begin_inset space ~
37927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37929 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37936 \begin_layout Subsection
37938 \begin_inset Index idx
37941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37954 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37972 \begin_inset Index idx
37975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37976 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37985 \begin_layout Standard
37986 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37987 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37988 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37989 -packages and programs it needs; see
37991 \begin_inset space ~
37995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37997 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38004 \begin_layout Subsection
38008 \begin_layout Standard
38013 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38014 \begin_inset space ~
38018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38020 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38027 \begin_layout Section
38029 \begin_inset Index idx
38032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38041 \begin_layout Standard
38042 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38043 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38045 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38049 \begin_layout Standard
38054 \begin_inset space ~
38059 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38060 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38061 packages and classes found
38062 by \SpecialChar LyX
38064 \begin_inset space ~
38068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38070 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38081 \begin_inset space ~
38086 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38091 \begin_layout Section
38093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38095 name "sec:Toolbars"
38102 \begin_layout Standard
38103 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38110 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38117 \begin_layout Standard
38118 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38119 This is described in the
38121 Additional Features
38126 \begin_layout Subsection
38128 \begin_inset Index idx
38131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38140 \begin_layout Standard
38141 \begin_inset Graphics
38142 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38150 \begin_layout Standard
38151 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38157 \begin_layout Standard
38158 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38175 \begin_inset Note Note
38178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38179 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38184 manual for more information.
38192 \begin_layout Standard
38193 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38199 \begin_layout Standard
38200 \begin_inset Tabular
38201 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38202 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38210 \begin_inset Graphics
38211 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38225 pull-down box for the environments
38238 \begin_layout Standard
38239 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38245 \begin_layout Standard
38247 \begin_inset Tabular
38248 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38249 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38250 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38251 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38275 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38305 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38335 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38342 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38351 arg "dialog-show print"
38359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38365 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38372 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38381 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38395 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38402 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38425 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38492 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38515 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38561 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38575 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38601 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38615 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38643 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38657 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38658 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38686 Emphasize text, function of the
38688 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38690 \begin_inset space ~
38693 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38723 Set text to noun style, function of the
38725 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38730 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38748 arg "textstyle-apply"
38756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38760 Format text using the current settings in the
38762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38764 \begin_inset space ~
38767 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38800 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38820 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38848 arg "tabular-insert"
38856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38878 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38890 Toggle outline window on/off,
38892 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38908 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38920 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38935 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38947 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38960 \begin_layout Subsection
38962 \begin_inset Index idx
38965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38974 \begin_layout Standard
38975 \begin_inset Graphics
38976 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38984 \begin_layout Standard
38985 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38991 \begin_layout Standard
38992 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38996 \begin_layout Standard
38997 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39003 \begin_layout Standard
39004 \begin_inset Tabular
39005 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39006 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39007 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39008 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39045 arg "layout Enumerate"
39053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39072 arg "layout Itemize"
39080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39126 arg "layout Description"
39134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39153 arg "depth-increment"
39161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39167 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39173 \begin_inset space ~
39182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 arg "depth-decrement"
39199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39205 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39207 \begin_inset space ~
39211 \begin_inset space ~
39220 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39229 arg "float-insert figure"
39237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39244 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39260 arg "float-insert table"
39268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39275 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39321 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39335 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39342 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39351 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39372 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39397 \begin_inset space ~
39406 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39415 arg "nomencl-insert"
39423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39431 \begin_inset space ~
39440 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39449 arg "footnote-insert"
39457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39463 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39479 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39495 \begin_inset space ~
39504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39528 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39530 \begin_inset space ~
39539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39548 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39624 \begin_inset space ~
39633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39642 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39657 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39673 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39688 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39690 \begin_inset space ~
39699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39708 arg "dialog-show character"
39716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39722 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39724 \begin_inset space ~
39727 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39743 arg "layout-paragraph"
39751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39757 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39759 \begin_inset space ~
39768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39777 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39791 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39805 \begin_layout Subsection
39806 View/Update Toolbar
39807 \begin_inset Index idx
39810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39811 Toolbar ! View / Update
39819 \begin_layout Standard
39820 \begin_inset Graphics
39821 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39828 \begin_layout Standard
39829 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39835 \begin_layout Standard
39836 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39840 \begin_layout Standard
39841 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39847 \begin_layout Standard
39848 \begin_inset Tabular
39849 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39850 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39851 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39852 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39892 arg "buffer-update"
39900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39922 arg "master-buffer-view"
39930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39956 arg "master-buffer-update"
39964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39970 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39972 \begin_inset space ~
39976 \begin_inset space ~
39985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39994 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40009 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40010 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40011 Synchronize with Output
40017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40022 \begin_inset Graphics
40023 filename ../images/view-others.png
40025 groupId toolbarbuttons
40036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40043 View (Other Formats)
40049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40054 \begin_inset Graphics
40055 filename ../images/update-others.png
40057 groupId toolbarbuttons
40066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40072 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40073 Update (Other Formats)
40086 \begin_layout Standard
40087 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40091 \begin_layout Subsection
40095 \begin_layout Standard
40096 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40103 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40107 , the table toolbar
40108 \begin_inset Index idx
40111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40120 \begin_inset space ~
40125 manual and the math macro toolbar
40126 \begin_inset Index idx
40129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40142 \begin_layout Chapter
40143 The Document Settings
40144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40146 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40151 \begin_inset Index idx
40154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40155 Document ! Settings
40163 \begin_layout Standard
40167 \begin_inset space ~
40172 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40173 is called with the menu
40175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40179 You can save your document settings as default with the
40181 Save as Document Defaults
40183 button in any dialog.
40184 This will create a template named
40188 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40189 when you create a new document without
40193 \begin_layout Standard
40198 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40199 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40202 \begin_layout Standard
40203 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40204 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40205 to find the one you are looking for.
40206 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40207 the submenus of the dialog.
40209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40213 \begin_inset space \space{}
40217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40224 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40225 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40226 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40229 \begin_layout Section
40233 \begin_layout Standard
40234 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40236 Document classes are described in section
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40243 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40251 \begin_layout Standard
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40260 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40265 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40266 as a layout for a document class.
40267 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40269 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40278 \begin_layout Standard
40279 Some classes use special class options by default.
40280 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40284 and you can decide to use them or not.
40285 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40286 recommended you leave them untouched.
40291 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40292 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40297 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40299 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40305 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40306 \begin_inset Newline newline
40311 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40314 \begin_inset Newline newline
40317 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40318 distribution, see section
40323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40325 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40337 \begin_layout Standard
40342 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40343 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40344 in the background if the child document
40345 is opened without its master.
40346 This way child documents are always compilable.
40347 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40354 \begin_inset space ~
40362 \begin_layout Standard
40363 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40374 \begin_inset Index idx
40377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40379 -packages ! prettyref
40385 \begin_inset Index idx
40388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40390 -packages ! refstyle
40395 for cross-references, see section
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40402 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40409 \begin_layout Section
40413 \begin_layout Standard
40414 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40415 Please refer to the section
40418 \begin_inset space ~
40426 \begin_inset space ~
40431 manual for details.
40434 \begin_layout Section
40438 \begin_layout Standard
40439 Modules are explained in section
40440 \begin_inset space ~
40444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40446 reference "subsec:Modules"
40453 \begin_layout Section
40457 \begin_layout Standard
40459 \begin_inset space ~
40463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40465 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40472 \begin_layout Section
40476 \begin_layout Standard
40477 The document font settings are described in section
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40484 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40491 \begin_layout Section
40495 \begin_layout Standard
40496 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40513 and whether it should be a
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40521 can also be specified here.
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40525 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40526 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40527 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40529 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40532 \begin_layout Standard
40535 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40538 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40539 justifies the text on screen.
40540 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40544 \begin_layout Section
40548 \begin_layout Standard
40549 This dialog is described in sections
40550 \begin_inset space ~
40554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40556 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40563 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40570 \begin_layout Section
40574 \begin_layout Standard
40575 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40582 reference "subsec:Margins"
40589 \begin_layout Section
40591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40593 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40598 \begin_inset Index idx
40601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40602 Language ! Encoding
40610 \begin_layout Standard
40611 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40612 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40613 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40615 is always encoded in utf8).
40616 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40617 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40618 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40619 -command is not known for
40620 a particular character).
40623 \begin_layout Standard
40624 If you use the option
40629 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40630 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40631 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40633 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40634 exactly one encoding.
40635 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40638 \begin_layout Standard
40640 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40641 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40642 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40643 installation supports Unicode), choose
40644 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40645 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40646 is quite incomplete, so
40647 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40652 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40653 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40654 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40655 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40656 -commands is not used, because all
40657 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40658 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40659 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40660 , two new alternative engines
40661 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40663 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40665 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40676 \begin_inset space ~
40684 \begin_inset space ~
40690 \begin_inset space ~
40694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40696 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40701 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40705 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40708 \begin_layout Standard
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40717 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40718 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40728 The possible settings are:
40731 \begin_layout Description
40732 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40734 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40735 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40745 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40752 \begin_layout Description
40753 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40754 format you will use.
40755 In many cases this will be
40760 \begin_inset Index idx
40763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40771 If the newer package
40776 \begin_inset Index idx
40779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40781 -packages ! polyglossia
40786 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40787 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40788 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40790 this package will be used instead of
40797 \begin_layout Description
40799 \begin_inset space ~
40810 would be more appropriate.
40813 \begin_layout Description
40814 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40815 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40819 (for German texts), type in
40822 \begin_inset Newline newline
40827 usepackage{ngerman}
40830 \begin_layout Description
40831 None will not use a language package.
40832 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40835 \begin_layout Standard
40836 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40839 \begin_layout Description
40841 \begin_inset space ~
40845 \begin_inset space ~
40849 \begin_inset space ~
40856 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40862 \begin_inset Index idx
40865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40867 -packages ! inputenc
40873 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40874 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40875 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40879 \begin_layout Description
40880 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40882 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40883 commands, which may result in a big
40884 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40885 -commands are needed.
40888 \begin_layout Description
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40894 \begin_inset space ~
40897 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40900 \begin_layout Description
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40909 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40912 \begin_layout Description
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40917 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40920 \begin_layout Description
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40929 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40930 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40933 \begin_layout Description
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40942 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40946 \begin_layout Description
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40955 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40956 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40959 \begin_layout Description
40961 \begin_inset space ~
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40972 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40973 \begin_inset space ~
40979 \begin_layout Description
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40992 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40993 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40996 \begin_layout Description
40998 \begin_inset space ~
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41005 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41006 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41007 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41008 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41019 \begin_layout Description
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41028 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41029 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41030 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41032 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41043 \begin_layout Description
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41052 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41055 \begin_layout Description
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41064 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41067 \begin_layout Description
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41076 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41079 \begin_layout Description
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41084 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41087 \begin_layout Description
41089 \begin_inset space ~
41092 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41095 \begin_layout Description
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41104 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41107 \begin_layout Description
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41113 \begin_inset space ~
41119 \begin_layout Description
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41128 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41131 \begin_layout Description
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41137 \begin_inset space ~
41143 \begin_layout Description
41145 \begin_inset space ~
41149 \begin_inset space ~
41152 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41158 \begin_inset Index idx
41161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41168 , when using this, set the document language to
41173 \begin_layout Description
41175 \begin_inset space ~
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41182 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41187 , when using this, set the document language to
41190 \begin_inset space ~
41196 \begin_layout Description
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41202 \begin_inset space ~
41205 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41211 \begin_inset Index idx
41214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41216 -packages ! japanese
41221 , when using this, set the document language to
41226 \begin_layout Description
41228 \begin_inset space ~
41232 \begin_inset space ~
41235 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41240 , when using this, set the document language to
41245 \begin_layout Description
41247 \begin_inset space ~
41251 \begin_inset space ~
41254 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41259 , when using this, set the document language to
41264 \begin_layout Description
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41269 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41272 \begin_layout Description
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41285 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41288 \begin_layout Description
41290 \begin_inset space ~
41294 \begin_inset space ~
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41301 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41302 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41303 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41306 \begin_layout Description
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41318 \begin_layout Description
41320 \begin_inset space ~
41324 \begin_inset space ~
41327 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41328 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41331 \begin_layout Description
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41340 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41346 \begin_inset Index idx
41349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41356 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41359 \begin_layout Description
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41369 \begin_inset space ~
41372 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41379 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41382 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41389 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41390 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41392 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41395 \begin_layout Description
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41404 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41410 \begin_inset Index idx
41413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41420 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41423 \begin_layout Description
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41428 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41434 \begin_inset Index idx
41437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41439 -packages ! inputenc
41445 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41449 \begin_layout Description
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41459 \begin_inset space ~
41462 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41469 \begin_layout Description
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41482 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41483 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41484 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41488 \begin_layout Description
41490 \begin_inset space ~
41494 \begin_inset space ~
41498 \begin_inset space ~
41501 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41502 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41505 \begin_layout Section
41507 \begin_inset Index idx
41510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41517 \begin_inset Index idx
41520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41527 \begin_inset Index idx
41530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41531 Color ! Shaded boxes
41537 \begin_inset Index idx
41540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41541 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41549 \begin_layout Standard
41550 Here you can alter the font color for the
41554 (default: black), for
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41562 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41566 (default: white) and for
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41579 sets the color back to the default.
41582 \begin_layout Standard
41583 Clicking any button showing
41591 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41592 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41593 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41594 later more quickly.
41597 \begin_layout Standard
41598 Note, if you change the
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41606 font color and use the option
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41614 in the document settings under
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41622 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41623 \begin_inset space ~
41627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41629 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41636 \begin_layout Standard
41637 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41643 \begin_layout Standard
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41656 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41662 Code after a forced page break:
41665 \begin_layout Itemize
41666 For the page color:
41667 \begin_inset Newline newline
41674 pagecolor{color name}
41677 \begin_layout Itemize
41678 For the text color:
41679 \begin_inset Newline newline
41689 \begin_layout Standard
41690 You are restricted to one of
41726 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41739 \begin_inset Newline newline
41742 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41743 names to refer to them:
41746 \begin_layout Itemize
41752 \begin_inset Newline newline
41757 page_backgroundcolor
41760 \begin_layout Itemize
41764 \begin_inset space ~
41770 \begin_inset Newline newline
41778 \begin_layout Itemize
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41788 \begin_inset Newline newline
41796 \begin_layout Itemize
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41806 \begin_inset Newline newline
41814 \begin_layout Standard
41815 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41834 \begin_layout Section
41838 \begin_layout Standard
41839 Here you can adjust the
41843 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41847 as described in section
41848 \begin_inset space ~
41852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41854 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41861 \begin_layout Section
41865 \begin_layout Standard
41866 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41872 \begin_inset Index idx
41875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41887 \begin_inset Index idx
41890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 -packages ! jurabib
41900 Sectioned bibliography
41902 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41908 \begin_inset Index idx
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41913 -packages ! bibtopic
41918 and you can select a
41922 for the generation of the bibliography.
41923 For a further description see section
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41930 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41937 \begin_layout Section
41941 \begin_layout Standard
41942 Here you can define the
41946 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41954 reference "sec:Index"
41961 \begin_layout Section
41965 \begin_layout Standard
41966 The PDF properties are explained in section
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41973 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41980 \begin_layout Section
41984 \begin_layout Standard
41985 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41986 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41992 \begin_inset Index idx
41995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41997 -packages ! amsmath
42007 \begin_inset Index idx
42010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42012 -packages ! amssymb
42022 \begin_inset Index idx
42025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42037 \begin_inset Index idx
42040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42052 \begin_inset Index idx
42055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42057 -packages ! mathdots
42067 \begin_inset Index idx
42070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42072 -packages ! mathtools
42082 \begin_inset Index idx
42085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42097 \begin_inset Index idx
42100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42102 -packages ! stackrel
42112 \begin_inset Index idx
42115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42117 -packages ! stmaryrd
42127 \begin_inset Index idx
42130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42132 -packages ! undertilde
42137 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42140 \begin_layout Description
42141 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42142 -errors in formulas,
42143 ensure that you have this enabled.
42146 \begin_layout Description
42147 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42148 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42149 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42153 \begin_layout Description
42154 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42157 \begin_inset space ~
42169 \begin_layout Description
42170 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42173 \begin_inset space ~
42185 \begin_layout Description
42186 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42197 \begin_layout Description
42198 mathtools is used for the math commands
42234 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42241 \begin_layout Description
42242 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42244 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42253 \begin_layout Description
42254 stackrel is used for the math command
42271 \begin_layout Description
42272 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42275 \begin_layout Description
42276 undertilde is used for the math command
42284 Accents for one Character
42293 \begin_layout Section
42297 \begin_layout Standard
42298 The float placement options are described in the section
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42309 \begin_inset space ~
42317 \begin_layout Section
42321 \begin_layout Standard
42322 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42324 Program Code Listings
42329 \begin_inset space ~
42337 \begin_layout Section
42341 \begin_layout Standard
42342 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42350 set to be used and set the
42355 The itemize environment is described in section
42356 \begin_inset space ~
42360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42362 reference "sec:Itemize"
42369 \begin_layout Standard
42370 You can furthermore specify a
42373 \begin_inset space ~
42378 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42379 command of the desired character.
42380 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42387 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42393 \begin_inset space \space{}
42397 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42407 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42408 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42411 \begin_layout Standard
42412 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42420 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42421 -packages in the preamble (menu
42424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42425 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42428 \begin_inset space ~
42434 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42438 usepackage{textcomp}
42441 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42445 usepackage{amssymb}
42455 \begin_layout Section
42459 \begin_layout Standard
42460 Branches are described in section
42461 \begin_inset space ~
42465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42467 reference "sec:Branches"
42474 \begin_layout Section
42476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42478 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42485 \begin_layout Standard
42486 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42489 \begin_layout Description
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42495 \begin_inset space ~
42498 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42518 View Master Document
42519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42526 Update Master Document
42527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42534 menu or the toolbar.
42535 The default is set in
42537 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42538 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42540 \begin_inset space ~
42543 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42547 \begin_inset space ~
42551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42553 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42560 \begin_layout Description
42562 \begin_inset space ~
42566 \begin_inset space ~
42569 Output settings for the menu
42571 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42573 \begin_inset space ~
42579 For a detailed description see section
42581 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42586 \begin_inset space ~
42594 \begin_layout Description
42596 \begin_inset space ~
42600 \begin_inset space ~
42603 Options offers settings for the export format
42611 \begin_inset space ~
42616 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42617 \begin_inset space ~
42620 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42624 \begin_inset space ~
42629 settings are described in detail in section
42631 Math Output in XHTML
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42645 \begin_inset space ~
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42654 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42657 \begin_layout Section
42665 \begin_layout Standard
42666 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42668 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42670 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42672 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42676 \begin_layout Standard
42677 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42678 -syntax is given in section
42679 \begin_inset space ~
42683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42685 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42692 \begin_layout Chapter
42698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42700 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42705 \begin_inset Index idx
42708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 \begin_layout Standard
42718 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42720 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42724 It has the following submenus.
42727 \begin_layout Section
42731 \begin_layout Subsection
42735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42736 User Interface File
42737 \begin_inset Index idx
42740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42741 Customization ! of toolbars
42747 \begin_inset Index idx
42750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42751 Customization ! of menus
42759 \begin_layout Standard
42760 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42761 interface (ui) file.
42762 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42770 \begin_layout Description
42775 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42778 \begin_layout Description
42785 the menu entries in popup context menus
42788 \begin_layout Description
42793 specifies the toolbar buttons
42796 \begin_layout Standard
42797 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42798 and edit the entries.
42801 \begin_layout Standard
42802 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42814 entries must be finished with an explicit
42839 and in the case of the
42840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42852 The syntax for the entries is:
42855 \begin_layout Standard
42856 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42885 \begin_layout Standard
42887 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42890 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42891 -functions are listed in the menu
42893 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42895 \begin_inset space ~
42903 \begin_layout Standard
42904 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42911 For example, assuming you use the menu
42913 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42916 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42920 \begin_layout Standard
42921 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42945 \begin_layout Standard
42947 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42962 to have the sixth bookmark.
42965 \begin_layout Standard
42969 \begin_inset space ~
42974 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42975 's toolbar buttons.
42976 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42977 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42980 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42991 \begin_layout Standard
42994 Enable tool tips in main work area
42996 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43004 \begin_layout Standard
43009 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43010 should display in the menu
43012 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43014 \begin_inset space ~
43022 \begin_layout Subsection
43026 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43030 \begin_layout Standard
43033 Restore window layouts and geometries
43036 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43037 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43041 \begin_layout Standard
43044 Restore cursor positions
43046 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43050 \begin_layout Standard
43053 Load opened files from last session
43055 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43059 \begin_layout Standard
43062 Clear all session information
43064 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43065 sessions (cursor positions, names
43066 of last opened documents, etc.).
43069 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43073 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43078 \begin_inset Index idx
43081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43093 Backup original documents when saving
43095 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43096 it was saved the last time.
43097 It is stored in the
43100 \begin_inset space ~
43106 \begin_inset space ~
43110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43112 reference "sec:Paths"
43116 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43119 \begin_inset space ~
43125 The backup file has the file extension
43126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43140 \begin_layout Standard
43143 Backup documents, every
43145 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43148 \begin_layout Standard
43151 Save documents compressed by default
43153 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43154 \begin_inset space ~
43158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43160 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43165 This applies to newly created documents only.
43166 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43170 Windows & work area
43173 \begin_layout Standard
43176 Open documents in tabs
43178 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43182 \begin_layout Standard
43187 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43200 reference "sec:Paths"
43204 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43211 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43212 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43213 of \SpecialChar LyX
43215 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43216 instance is created for each file.
43219 \begin_layout Standard
43222 Single close-tab button
43224 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43227 \begin_inset Graphics
43228 filename ../images/closetab.png
43235 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43236 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43239 \begin_layout Standard
43240 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43248 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43249 before the change takes effect.
43257 \begin_layout Standard
43262 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43264 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43266 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43270 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43271 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43272 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43275 \begin_layout Subsection
43277 \begin_inset Index idx
43280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43289 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43296 \begin_layout Standard
43297 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43310 This section only deals with the fonts
43314 the \SpecialChar LyX
43316 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43319 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43320 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43331 \begin_layout Standard
43332 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43349 (depends on the system) as its
43352 \begin_inset space ~
43368 \begin_layout Standard
43369 You can change the font size with the
43376 \begin_layout Standard
43381 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43386 points have the size of 1
43387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43391 \begin_inset space ~
43395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43397 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43402 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43407 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43408 \begin_inset space ~
43412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43414 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43421 \begin_layout Standard
43424 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43426 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43427 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43428 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43429 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43430 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43432 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43439 \begin_layout Subsection
43441 \begin_inset Index idx
43444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43445 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43452 \begin_inset Index idx
43455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43464 \begin_layout Standard
43465 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43466 by choosing an item in the
43467 list and selecting the
43474 \begin_layout Standard
43475 By checking the option
43479 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43482 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_inset space ~
43492 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43495 \begin_layout Subsection
43497 \begin_inset Index idx
43500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43509 \begin_layout Standard
43510 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43514 \begin_layout Standard
43519 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43520 This feature is described in section
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43527 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43534 \begin_layout Standard
43535 Checking the option
43538 \begin_inset space ~
43542 \begin_inset space ~
43546 \begin_inset space ~
43551 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43554 \begin_layout Section
43556 \begin_inset Index idx
43559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43568 \begin_layout Subsection
43572 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43576 \begin_layout Standard
43579 Cursor follows scrollbar
43581 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43585 \begin_layout Standard
43586 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43587 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43588 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43591 \begin_layout Standard
43594 Scroll below end of document
43596 is self-explanatory.
43599 \begin_layout Standard
43600 In \SpecialChar LyX
43601 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43608 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43610 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43611 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43614 \begin_layout Standard
43617 Sort environments alphabetically
43619 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43622 \begin_layout Standard
43625 Group environments by their category
43627 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43630 \begin_layout Standard
43635 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43646 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43650 \begin_layout Standard
43651 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43656 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43657 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43661 \begin_layout Subsection
43663 \begin_inset Index idx
43666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43673 \begin_inset Index idx
43676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43677 Settings ! Shortcuts
43685 \begin_layout Standard
43690 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43692 Several binding files are available, among them:
43695 \begin_layout Description
43696 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43699 \begin_layout Description
43700 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43712 \begin_layout Description
43713 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43724 \begin_layout Standard
43725 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43730 , and binding files for special languages.
43731 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43736 \begin_inset space \space{}
43740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43748 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43749 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43750 will try to use the appropriate binding
43754 \begin_layout Standard
43755 Some binding files, like
43759 , only have a limited scope.
43760 When looking at the end of the file
43764 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43767 \begin_layout Standard
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43775 \begin_inset space ~
43780 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43781 in the selected key binding file.
43784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43788 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43793 \begin_inset Index idx
43796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43797 Key Bindings ! Editing
43805 \begin_layout Standard
43806 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43807 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43808 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43809 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43812 Show key-bindings containing
43815 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43816 Insert there for example as keyword
43817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43824 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43825 functions that contain
43826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43834 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43835 All \SpecialChar LyX
43836 functions are also listed in the file
43841 that you will find in the
43848 \begin_layout Standard
43849 For example, to add the shortcut
43857 , select the function and press the
43862 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43863 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43866 \begin_layout Standard
43867 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43868 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43870 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43871 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43873 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43878 \begin_layout Standard
43879 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43882 \begin_layout Standard
43883 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43885 The syntax of the entries is:
43888 \begin_layout Standard
43894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43913 \begin_layout Subsection
43915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43917 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43922 \begin_inset Index idx
43925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43932 \begin_inset Index idx
43935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43936 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43944 \begin_layout Standard
43945 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43946 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43947 provides keyboard maps.
43948 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43949 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43952 \begin_inset space ~
43956 \begin_inset space ~
43961 and select the keyboard map file named
43968 \begin_layout Standard
43977 keyboard map and, if you use the
43981 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43984 arg "keymap-primary"
43990 arg "keymap-secondary"
43993 respectively or toggle between them with
43996 arg "keymap-toggle"
44002 \begin_layout Standard
44003 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44011 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44020 \begin_layout Standard
44021 You can also specify the mouse
44023 Wheel scrolling speed
44026 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44030 \begin_layout Standard
44038 \begin_inset space ~
44042 \begin_inset space ~
44047 you can select a key for zooming.
44048 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44051 \begin_layout Subsection
44055 \begin_layout Standard
44056 Input completion is described in section
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44063 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44070 \begin_layout Section
44072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44079 \begin_inset Index idx
44082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44089 \begin_inset Index idx
44092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 \begin_layout Standard
44102 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44103 are normally determined during
44105 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44108 \begin_layout Description
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44113 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44114 's working directory.
44115 It is the default when you
44126 \begin_inset space ~
44134 \begin_layout Description
44136 \begin_inset space ~
44139 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44141 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44143 \begin_inset space ~
44147 \begin_inset space ~
44155 \begin_layout Description
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44160 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44166 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44170 \begin_inset Newline newline
44174 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44186 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44187 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44195 \begin_layout Description
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44201 \begin_inset Index idx
44204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44210 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44211 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44212 \begin_inset space ~
44216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44218 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44226 will be used to save the backups.
44227 \begin_inset Newline newline
44230 Backup files have the ending
44231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44241 \begin_layout Description
44243 \begin_inset space ~
44246 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44247 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44249 \begin_inset Newline newline
44256 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44262 You can edit this file with the program
44271 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44272 in its preferences under
44275 \begin_inset space ~
44281 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44286 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44288 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44289 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44295 and \SpecialChar LyX
44296 need to be running the same time.
44297 \begin_inset Newline newline
44300 The pipe is also used for the
44305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44311 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44316 \begin_inset Newline newline
44319 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44320 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44321 \begin_inset Newline newline
44337 \begin_layout Description
44339 \begin_inset space ~
44342 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44345 \begin_layout Description
44347 \begin_inset space ~
44350 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44351 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44352 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44355 \begin_layout Description
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44360 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44366 You only need to specify it if you are using
44370 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44372 For \SpecialChar LyX
44377 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44381 \begin_layout Description
44383 \begin_inset space ~
44386 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44387 When \SpecialChar LyX
44388 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44389 to find it on the system.
44390 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44392 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44401 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44402 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44405 \begin_layout Description
44407 \begin_inset space ~
44410 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44411 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44412 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44413 code or in the document
44415 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44417 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44418 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44419 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44420 scanned for the input files.
44421 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44422 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44424 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44425 compilation may fail for some documents.
44428 \begin_layout Section
44432 \begin_layout Standard
44433 Here you can insert your
44442 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44444 \begin_inset space ~
44448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44450 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44454 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44457 \begin_layout Section
44459 \begin_inset Index idx
44462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44463 Language ! Settings
44469 \begin_inset Index idx
44472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44473 Settings ! Language
44481 \begin_layout Subsection
44483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44485 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44492 \begin_layout Description
44494 \begin_inset space ~
44498 \begin_inset space ~
44501 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44503 You can find its actual translation status here:
44504 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44506 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44513 \begin_layout Description
44515 \begin_inset space ~
44518 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44519 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44520 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44521 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44538 The most widespread language package is
44543 \begin_inset Index idx
44546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44553 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44555 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44556 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44557 come with the alternative
44563 \begin_inset Index idx
44566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 -packages ! polyglossia
44573 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44574 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44580 The available selections are described in section
44581 \begin_inset space ~
44585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44587 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44594 \begin_layout Description
44596 \begin_inset space ~
44599 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44600 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44601 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44602 An example is the start command
44608 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44610 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44614 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44629 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44634 \begin_layout Description
44636 \begin_inset space ~
44644 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44645 command toggles the package on and off.
44648 \begin_layout Description
44650 \begin_inset space ~
44654 \begin_inset space ~
44657 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44661 \begin_layout Description
44663 \begin_inset space ~
44667 \begin_inset space ~
44670 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44674 \begin_layout Description
44676 \begin_inset space ~
44680 \begin_inset space ~
44683 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44684 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44685 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44687 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44694 \begin_layout Description
44696 \begin_inset space ~
44699 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44701 When this option is not set, the
44704 \begin_inset space ~
44709 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44711 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44714 \begin_inset space ~
44722 \begin_layout Description
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44730 \begin_inset space ~
44736 When it is not set, the
44739 \begin_inset space ~
44744 is set to the end of the document.
44747 \begin_layout Description
44749 \begin_inset space ~
44753 \begin_inset space ~
44756 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44757 language will be underlined in blue.
44760 \begin_layout Description
44762 \begin_inset space ~
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44769 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44770 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44773 \begin_layout Description
44775 \begin_inset space ~
44778 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44779 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44780 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44781 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44784 \begin_layout Subsection
44788 \begin_layout Standard
44789 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44796 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44803 \begin_layout Section
44807 \begin_layout Subsection
44811 \begin_layout Description
44813 \begin_inset space ~
44817 \begin_inset space ~
44820 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44823 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44824 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44826 \begin_inset space ~
44832 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44835 \begin_layout Description
44837 \begin_inset space ~
44841 \begin_inset Index idx
44844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44851 \begin_inset Index idx
44854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 Settings ! Date format
44860 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44861 \begin_inset Newline newline
44865 \begin_inset Flex URL
44868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44870 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44876 \begin_inset Newline newline
44879 For example the format
44880 \begin_inset Newline newline
44884 \begin_inset Newline newline
44887 prints the date as day/month/year.
44890 \begin_layout Description
44892 \begin_inset space ~
44896 \begin_inset space ~
44899 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44900 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44903 \begin_layout Description
44905 \begin_inset space ~
44908 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44910 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44912 \begin_inset space ~
44918 For a detailed description see section
44920 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44925 \begin_inset space ~
44933 \begin_layout Subsection
44939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44941 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44946 \begin_inset Index idx
44949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44950 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44959 \begin_layout Description
44961 \begin_inset space ~
44969 \begin_inset space ~
44973 \begin_inset space ~
44976 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44981 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45002 are used for Cyrillic.
45003 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45016 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45018 sets up in the background.
45019 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45022 \begin_layout Description
45024 \begin_inset space ~
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45031 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45036 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45040 \begin_layout Description
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45046 \begin_inset space ~
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45054 \begin_inset space ~
45057 options They only have an effect when the program
45061 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45064 \begin_layout Standard
45065 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45066 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45067 manuals of the applications.
45070 \begin_layout Description
45072 \begin_inset space ~
45075 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45076 \begin_inset space ~
45080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45082 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45089 \begin_layout Description
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45094 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45095 \begin_inset space ~
45099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45101 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45108 \begin_layout Description
45110 \begin_inset space ~
45113 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45114 \begin_inset space ~
45118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45120 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45127 \begin_layout Description
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45136 command Command for the program
45138 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45141 that is described in the section
45143 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45148 Additional Features
45153 \begin_layout Standard
45154 There are additionally the following options:
45157 \begin_layout Description
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45171 \begin_inset space ~
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45179 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45197 to separate folders.
45198 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45200 \begin_inset Index idx
45203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45210 \begin_inset Index idx
45213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45222 \begin_layout Description
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45232 \begin_inset space ~
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45240 \begin_inset space ~
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45247 changes Removes all manually set
45253 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45254 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45256 \begin_inset space ~
45261 dialog when changing the document class.
45264 \begin_layout Section
45266 \begin_inset space ~
45270 \begin_inset Index idx
45273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45282 \begin_layout Subsection
45284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45286 name "subsec:Converters"
45291 \begin_inset Index idx
45294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45303 \begin_layout Standard
45304 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45305 from one format to another.
45306 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45307 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45314 \begin_inset space ~
45319 field and press the
45324 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45333 drop-down list, modify the
45337 field and press the
45344 \begin_layout Standard
45347 Converter File Cache
45353 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45355 Maximum Age (in days
45358 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45359 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45362 \begin_layout Standard
45363 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45364 definition, is described in the section
45375 \begin_layout Subsection
45377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45379 name "sec:File-Formats"
45384 \begin_inset Index idx
45387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45394 \begin_inset Index idx
45397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45406 \begin_layout Standard
45407 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45417 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45420 \begin_layout Standard
45421 You can also define the
45423 Default output format
45425 that is used when you use
45427 View, Update, View Master Document
45431 Update Master Document
45437 menu or the toolbar.
45440 \begin_layout Standard
45441 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45452 \begin_layout Standard
45453 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45455 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45456 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45457 This is done by specifying a
45462 More about this is described in the section
45473 \begin_layout Chapter
45474 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45476 \begin_inset Index idx
45479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45488 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45495 \begin_layout Standard
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45503 reference "tab:Units"
45507 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45508 and used in this documentation.
45511 \begin_layout Standard
45512 \begin_inset Float table
45518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45519 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45537 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45545 \begin_inset Tabular
45546 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45547 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45548 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45549 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45550 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45756 scaled point (65536
45757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45835 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45908 % of original image width
45913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46224 \begin_layout Chapter
46226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46228 name "chap:Credits"
46235 \begin_layout Standard
46236 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46237 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46240 \begin_layout Itemize
46243 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46246 \begin_layout Itemize
46252 \begin_layout Itemize
46258 \begin_layout Itemize
46264 \begin_layout Itemize
46270 \begin_layout Itemize
46276 \begin_layout Itemize
46282 \begin_layout Itemize
46288 \begin_layout Itemize
46291 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46294 \begin_layout Itemize
46300 \begin_layout Itemize
46306 \begin_layout Itemize
46312 \begin_layout Itemize
46318 \begin_layout Itemize
46324 \begin_layout Itemize
46330 \begin_layout Itemize
46336 \begin_layout Itemize
46342 \begin_layout Itemize
46343 The \SpecialChar LyX
46345 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46354 \begin_layout Standard
46355 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46358 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46365 \begin_layout Bibliography
46366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46367 LatexCommand bibitem
46373 The \SpecialChar LyX
46375 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46378 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46383 \begin_inset Newline newline
46387 \begin_inset Flex URL
46390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46392 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46400 \begin_layout Bibliography
46401 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46402 LatexCommand bibitem
46403 key "latexcompanion"
46407 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46409 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46410 Companion Second Edition.
46413 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46416 \begin_layout Bibliography
46417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46418 LatexCommand bibitem
46423 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46426 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46430 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46433 \begin_layout Bibliography
46434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46435 LatexCommand bibitem
46443 : A Document Preparation System.
46446 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46449 \begin_layout Bibliography
46450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46451 LatexCommand bibitem
46460 The \SpecialChar TeX
46464 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46467 \begin_layout Bibliography
46468 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46469 LatexCommand bibitem
46474 The \SpecialChar TeX
46476 \begin_inset Newline newline
46480 \begin_inset Flex URL
46483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46485 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46493 \begin_layout Bibliography
46494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46495 LatexCommand bibitem
46500 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46502 \begin_inset Newline newline
46506 \begin_inset Flex URL
46509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46511 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46519 \begin_layout Bibliography
46520 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46521 LatexCommand bibitem
46527 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46529 name "Documentation"
46530 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46536 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46540 \begin_inset Newline newline
46544 \begin_inset Flex URL
46547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46549 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46557 \begin_layout Bibliography
46558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46559 LatexCommand bibitem
46565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46567 name "Documentation"
46568 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46572 how to use the program
46574 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46578 \begin_inset Newline newline
46582 \begin_inset Flex URL
46585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46587 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46595 \begin_layout Bibliography
46596 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46597 LatexCommand bibitem
46603 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46605 name "Documentation"
46606 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46615 \begin_inset Newline newline
46619 \begin_inset Flex URL
46622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46624 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46632 \begin_layout Bibliography
46633 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46634 LatexCommand bibitem
46635 key "makeindex-man"
46640 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46643 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46652 \begin_inset Newline newline
46656 \begin_inset Flex URL
46659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46661 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46669 \begin_layout Bibliography
46670 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46671 LatexCommand bibitem
46677 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46679 name "Documentation"
46680 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46689 \begin_inset Newline newline
46693 \begin_inset Flex URL
46696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46698 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46706 \begin_layout Bibliography
46707 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46708 LatexCommand bibitem
46714 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46716 name "Documentation"
46717 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46721 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46723 \begin_inset Newline newline
46727 \begin_inset Flex URL
46730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46732 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46740 \begin_layout Bibliography
46741 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46742 LatexCommand bibitem
46748 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46750 name "Documentation"
46751 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46755 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46761 \begin_inset Index idx
46764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46766 -packages ! caption
46772 \begin_inset Newline newline
46776 \begin_inset Flex URL
46779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46781 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46789 \begin_layout Bibliography
46790 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46791 LatexCommand bibitem
46797 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46799 name "Documentation"
46800 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46804 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46810 \begin_inset Index idx
46813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46815 -packages ! enumitem
46821 \begin_inset Newline newline
46825 \begin_inset Flex URL
46828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46830 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46838 \begin_layout Bibliography
46839 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46840 LatexCommand bibitem
46846 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46848 name "Documentation"
46849 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46853 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46859 \begin_inset Index idx
46862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46864 -packages ! fancyhdr
46870 \begin_inset Newline newline
46874 \begin_inset Flex URL
46877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46879 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46887 \begin_layout Bibliography
46888 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46889 LatexCommand bibitem
46895 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46897 name "Documentation"
46898 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46902 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46908 \begin_inset Index idx
46911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 -packages ! hyperref
46919 \begin_inset Newline newline
46923 \begin_inset Flex URL
46926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46928 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46936 \begin_layout Bibliography
46937 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46938 LatexCommand bibitem
46944 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46946 name "Documentation"
46947 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46951 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46957 \begin_inset Index idx
46960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46962 -packages ! nomencl
46968 \begin_inset Newline newline
46972 \begin_inset Flex URL
46975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46977 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46985 \begin_layout Bibliography
46986 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46987 LatexCommand bibitem
46993 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46995 name "Documentation"
46996 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47000 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47006 \begin_inset Index idx
47009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47011 -packages ! prettyref
47017 \begin_inset Newline newline
47021 \begin_inset Flex URL
47024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47026 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47034 \begin_layout Bibliography
47035 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47036 LatexCommand bibitem
47042 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47044 name "Documentation"
47045 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47049 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47055 \begin_inset Index idx
47058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47060 -packages ! refstyle
47066 \begin_inset Newline newline
47070 \begin_inset Flex URL
47073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47075 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47083 \begin_layout Bibliography
47084 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47085 LatexCommand bibitem
47091 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47094 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47098 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47100 \begin_inset Newline newline
47104 \begin_inset Flex URL
47107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47109 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47117 \begin_layout Bibliography
47118 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47119 LatexCommand bibitem
47125 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47128 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47132 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47134 \begin_inset Newline newline
47138 \begin_inset Flex URL
47141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47143 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47151 \begin_layout Bibliography
47152 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47153 LatexCommand bibitem
47159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47162 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47166 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47167 for Cyrillic languages:
47168 \begin_inset Newline newline
47172 \begin_inset Flex URL
47175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47177 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47185 \begin_layout Bibliography
47186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47187 LatexCommand bibitem
47193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47196 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47200 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47202 \begin_inset Newline newline
47206 \begin_inset Flex URL
47209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47211 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47219 \begin_layout Bibliography
47220 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47221 LatexCommand bibitem
47227 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47230 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47234 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47236 \begin_inset Newline newline
47240 \begin_inset Flex URL
47243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47245 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47253 \begin_layout Bibliography
47254 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47255 LatexCommand bibitem
47261 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47264 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47268 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47270 \begin_inset Newline newline
47274 \begin_inset Flex URL
47277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47279 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47287 \begin_layout Bibliography
47288 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47289 LatexCommand bibitem
47295 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47298 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47302 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47304 \begin_inset Newline newline
47308 \begin_inset Flex URL
47311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47313 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47321 \begin_layout Bibliography
47322 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47323 LatexCommand bibitem
47329 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47332 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47336 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47338 \begin_inset Newline newline
47342 \begin_inset Flex URL
47345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47347 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47355 \begin_layout Bibliography
47356 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47357 LatexCommand bibitem
47363 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47366 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47370 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47372 \begin_inset Newline newline
47376 \begin_inset Flex URL
47379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47381 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47389 \begin_layout Bibliography
47390 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47391 LatexCommand bibitem
47397 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47400 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47404 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47406 \begin_inset Newline newline
47410 \begin_inset Flex URL
47413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47415 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47423 \begin_layout Bibliography
47424 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47425 LatexCommand bibitem
47431 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47434 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47438 about new features in
47444 \begin_inset Newline newline
47448 \begin_inset Flex URL
47451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47453 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47461 \begin_layout Standard
47462 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47496 \begin_inset Note Note
47499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47506 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47507 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47508 bibliography is the second one:
47516 \begin_layout Standard
47517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47518 LatexCommand bibtex
47519 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47520 options "biblio/alphadin"
47527 \begin_layout Standard
47528 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47532 \begin_layout Standard
47533 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47534 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47540 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47541 LatexCommand printindex